Home

Chrysler 2007 Pacifica Automobile User Manual

1. To Resume Speed i gash eee a ne ae 151 SeCUEIy usb s s ata Rae a OR aie 160 To Vary The Speed Setting 151 MiPower Sunroof If Equipped 160 To Accelerate For Passing 152 Express Open Feature 0 161 H Overhead Console If Equipped 153 Wind Buffetng sasear pesii aai ee we d 163 Courtesy Reading Lights 153 Sunroof Maintenance aaa aaa aa aaa 163 Sunglasses Storage 000000 153 Wi Electrical Power Outlets 00 0 163 lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 154 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 164 Programming HomeLink nn 155 MyCHChOIdCES 6s caw ga e SOCCER ROOM 165 Canadian Programming Gate Programming 158 Front Seat Cupholders 165 Using HomeLink 0 00 159 Second Row Seat Cupholders 165 Erasing HomeLink Buttons 159 Third Row Seat Cupholders If Equipped 166 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button 159 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 nor m 166 Cargo De Down Hooks ae eke r 168 Console Features llle 166 Wi Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 169 Rear Cargo Storage Bin If Equipped 166 W Load Leveling System Lese 172 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If
2. Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format Program Type Radio Display types Religious Music Religious Music Program Type Radio Display Religious Talk Religious Talk Adult Hits Adult Hit Rock Rock Classical Classical Soft Soft Classic Rock Classic Rock Soft Rock Soft Rock College College Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Country Country Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 Foreign Language Language Weather Weather NEWS ewe By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is Nostal E Nostal displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Oldies Oldies station with the same selected PTY name The PTY Personality Personality function only operates when in the FM and Satellite if Public Public equipped modes Rhythm and Blues R amp B 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The radio display will flash SEEK and the selected PTY program type when searching for the next PTY station If no station is found with the selected PTY program type the radio will return to the last preset station If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station Mode Press the MODE button to select between AM FM CD CD DVD changer or the Satellite Radio if equipped When the Satellite Radio if equipped is selected SA will appear in your radio display A disc may remain
3. nn SCHEDULE B 421 H Miles 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 33 000 36 000 n Kilometers 34 000 38 000 43 000 48 000 53 000 58 000 n Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X N Rotate Tires X X X 4 Inspect the brake linings X X C Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if X X X X X E necessary S Replace the engine air cleaner filter X C Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Front amp X B Rear D Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary X U Change the All Wheel Drive AWD power X E transfer unit fluid See note at the end of this S chart 8 Change the All Wheel Drive AWD rear carrier X fluid See the note at the end of this chart Replace the air conditioning filter X X H 422 SCHEDULE B E N Miles 39 000 42 000 45 000 48 000 51 000 54 000 l Kilometers 62 000 67 000 72 000 77 000 82 000 86 000 Ng Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate Tires X X X M Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if X X X X X hg necessary IM Replace the engine air cleaner filter X B Change the All Wheel Drive power transfer X ng unit fluid See the note at the end of this IM chart Change the All Wheel Drive AWD rear car X fw rier fluid See note at the end of this chart hi Replace the
4. 124 Rear Window Defroster 002055 259 Rear Window Features 000055 139 Rear Wiper Washer isses 139 Rearview Mirrors llle 88 Reclining Front Seats 000 118 Recorder Event Data 00000008 65 Recreational Towing 000 342 358 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 0000 eee 48 Remote Control llle 224 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 237 Replacement Keys 0 00 00 cesses 16 Replacement Parts aiani a eee eee 368 Replacement Tites xir meg os 4 ate obs 304 Reporting Safety Defects osso co accorsa adras cas 441 Restraint Head Restraints Child esee 67 76 Restraints Infant sod oL rd pn dae 68 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 167 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 4 356 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 169 Rotation les s ec6eik ox ee eae va ee bad 3 307 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 80 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 81 Safety Defects Reporting 4 441 Safety Exhaust Gas 6 0 eee eee 39 Safety Information Tire 040 288 Safety DipS cssc Pak dese EX SOR EUN Y CO Peor 79 Satellite Radio 2 eee ee ee ee 233 Satellite Radio Antenna 0 237 Schedule Maintenance llle 416 Seat Belt Maintenance
5. 00 401 Seat Belt Reminder 00 000005 48 Seat Belts 22r RR RR Rs 40 en INDEX 459 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 46 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 46 And Pregnant Women 0000006 49 Child Restraint sns iot aep naaa i esses 67 69 Extender i 26xe m bem RE ads 49 brontSedt benes sesssnespe RARE EE 41 Pr tensiofi rS ssa geen CE Hews ors 47 Reat Seat etera sieve ees hie oe aera rad 41 Reminder oi i665 bee tae eng 186 Untwisting Procedure 00000 47 SOAS sc ccias sese eed XU HEX a EXT daa ES 114 Adjustment sieaa cues se sdwet yaks wa es 119 Easy ENY ed Po eget ete ee ee es 121 130 Heated sing ot edt ieee dore erre 116 MemotLy eoe d bao ed pee eR Bee Lae EUR 127 POWER ite Hoare wit Gee ihe eden 114 115 Reclining 4223 eben x Sede E tee hake a 118 TIGNE ccr nete aed EE rura cce Erg ees 121 Security Alarm Theft Alarm Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 384 412 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Programming 4 17 Service Assistance 0 0 ee eee 438 Service Contract 2 cee eee eee 440 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 185 Service Manuals 00 00 ee eee 442 setting the Clock a essei coe ba neg 199 200 Shoulder Belts 0 llle 41 Signals Turri sic isu gene ee men 181 408 409 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 287 Snow Chains Tire Chains
6. 000 232 ll Navigation System If Equipped 232 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 H Satellite Radio If Equipped System Activation Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID lessen Selecting Satellite Mode In RBB RAH And RBK Radios Selecting Satellite Mode In RBP RBU RAZ RB1 And RBQ Radios Selecting a Channel 005 Storing And Selecting Pre Set Channels Using The PTY Program Type Button If Equipped PTY Button Scan 2 lle PTY Button Seek 0 llle Satellite Antenna 00 237 Reception Quality gt css remiss cnra gks 237 ll Remote Sound System Controls 237 Radio Operation see a nenes EE artes re na ca 238 Tape Player CD Player lll Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance 239 ll CD DVD Disc Maintenance 240 ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 240 li Climate Controls cosi eed 240 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating DYSON c wad eee e bed e a ve e y En 241 Mode Control 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Manual Air Conditioning Operation 246 Electric Rear Window Defroster 259 Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control 249 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 INSTRUM
7. e Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Fuel System Hoses Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are designed with hoses and quick connect fittings which have unique material characteristics to provide adequate Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture You are urged to use only the manufacture specified hoses with quick connect fittings or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings to insure they are properly installed and fully connected See your authorized dealer for service Automatic Transmission The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing All automatic transmissions are equipped with a conven tional filler tube and dipstick If fluid is added it should be added through the dipstick hole in the case The dipstick is located just behind the radiator lower right side Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is use
8. ae px sw ele a Ras al 201 Mini Trip Functions If Equipped 199 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se lll Sales Code RAH AM amp FM Stereo Radio With CD Player And CD DVD Changer Controls 202 Radio Operation 0 0000 202 CD Player Operation 0 04 206 CD DVD Changer Operation 208 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 208 Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play ee erasers re e was 210 ll Sales Code REV AM amp FM Stereo Radio With CD Player And CD DVD Changer Controls 212 Radio Operation sedes rrer arai tt tenens 212 CD Player Operation 00 216 CD DVD Changer Operation 218 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 218 Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play 4 24343 xo ret inia nrs 220 lil 6 Disc CD DVD Changer RDV It Bquipped ss ea ees es Re t bem e 221 Operating Instructions CD DVD Changer 222 Eject EJT Button 0 0 asienta araa 224 Operating Instructions Remote Control 224 Operating Instructions Video Screen 228 Operating Instructions Headphones 230 Operating Instructions MP3 Player Portable Walkman 04 22 o e s guts denera od oS 232 Operating Instructions Video Games Camcorders
9. 14 If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel occ isa Panne RR ek Reb RE 14 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 14 Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System 15 ll Sentry Key If Equipped 15 Shaft Lock Module Vehicles Equipped With Premium Security System If Equipped 16 Replacement Keys 0000000 16 Customer Key Programming 17 General Information lessen 18 H Security Alarm System If Equipped 18 Rearming Of The System If Equipped 18 To Arm The System 000006 18 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Disarm The System 200 19 Power Door Locks sererai ana Kaore asn 28 Security System Manual Override 19 Child Protection Door Lock 31 Bi Illuminated Entry System 0 0 20 AETVUNIIONS i305 44 paama a Basses eo s 33 Bl Remote Keyless Entry 000004 20 Power Windows 000 000 e eee 33 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Ux Gate ry ee oes pea dr see eee ES e 35 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 Power Liftgate If Equipped 37 To Open Close Power Liftgate If Equipped 23 Mi Occupant Restraints 004 40 Flash L
10. 306 SHOW TIES aed x RR aia ads Tae ws Eas 307 Spare Wie x idu cities au gehen owe es 301 302 348 Spark Plugs sie tre BS i RIS 374 Speed Control Cruise Control 150 Speedometer retssystem a Gia he ae Rs Stari auis d garder s Eon Pado dd ao ora i d ce Automatic Transmission 460 INDEX MM Engine Fails to Start liliis 268 Starting and Operating 04 266 Starting Procedures cs suse RR nn 266 Steering UNKA gE caseus dos dona diss E mare aia 380 POWeE L2doneREG dabei Oe ROR ee E 286 379 Shaft Seal 4 22 wr siepi wad LER ELE 380 Tilt Col mn 22 chien tae eee VeRO EROR 141 Wheel Lock 0 0 00 ee eee 14 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls nies ik ke d Rc e RV ED UR oR ee 237 SOAGE iuerexa oes aa d epq adu aca 166 405 Storage Vehicle mer ERE IET I 258 405 storing Your Vehicle uu ashi et oth E des 405 Sut ROOP S ia Sc ue ek OR EVE E dei duri VES a 160 Sun Visor Extension llle 91 Sunglasses Storage so sars ni eee ees 153 Sunroof Maintenance 00000 eee 163 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 50 Synthetic Engine Oil wk ek ee a pa 373 System Navigation cece eens 232 Tachometer serora dne ava a pese ume FR SUR 184 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 249 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 180 345 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 71 74 Tie Down Hooks Cargo essers 0 000600 eae 168 Ti
11. Front amp Rear Suspension Ball Joints The suspension ball joints are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these components Steering Shaft Seal The steering shaft seal at the point where the shaft passes through the bulkhead is lubricated when it is installed If the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned it should be lubricated with a multi purpose grease Mopar multi purpose lubricant is recommended Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and do not require periodic maintenance Drive Shaft Universal Joints Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints Peri odic lubrication of these joints is not required However the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed If leakage or damage is evident the universal joint boot and grease should be replaced immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Continued operation could result in failure of the univer sal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease This would require complete replacement of the joint assembly Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors liftgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust
12. Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather To clear the windows use the A C button to reduce the humidity inside the vehicle Fogging on the inside of the windshield can be quickly removed by pressing the defrost button and increasing the blower speed Do not use the Recirculation mode without the A C button for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Before driving always make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves ice or snow which could reduce airflow and or plug the water drain tube inside the plenum es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 A C Air Filter If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con trol ATC the climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air Refer to section 7 Air Conditioning for filter replacement instructions Outside Temperature Display The outside temperature can be shown in the ATC display by pressing the OUTSIDE TEMP button After pressing this button the front seat pa
13. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders Removal Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward Cleaning Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth Installation Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FUSES INTEGRATED POWER MODULE Cavity Cartridge Description ui m Fuse 1 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Green ABS Pump 2 Spare 3 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD Pink 4 40 Amp Body Control Module Green BCM Feed 1 5 40 Amp Electronic Back Light EBL Green e 6 30 Amp Front Wipers Integrated Power Module IPM ins An Integrated Power Mo
14. indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacture s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule all belts should be checked for condition and proper tension Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks or glazing and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer ence between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spa
15. under Hee Wine xleneIOm cand Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on ing precautions are not observed the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power a complete stop Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignitio
16. 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park Always block or chock the trailer wheels m GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2
17. 90 Advanced Phone Connectivity 106 Power Remote Control Mirrors 90 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System llle 108 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Seats seats et wed a eee Ss aah epee bo 10 Way Driver s Power Seat If Equipped 8 Way Driver s Power Seat If Equipped 4 Way Passenger s Power Seat Adjustable Head Restraints Heated Seats If Equipped Second Row Manual Seat Recliner It Equipped ss csse p Ye te ea ees Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster It Equipped iss ems Second Row Bench Seating If Equipped Second Row Fold amp Tumble Seats If Equipped 6 00 eee eee Third Row Easy Exit If Equipped 114 115 115 115 116 118 119 120 Third Row Seating If Equipped 124 Load Floor If Equipped 125 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer 126 ll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 127 Easy Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only praseta gene dace eed pales 130 Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Memory Seat Only If Equipped 131 ll To Open And Close The Hood 131 W Lights ease aida awe fea Weds es 133 Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 133
18. GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If we
19. Headphone Transmitter 17 Enter 2 Menu Up Next Track Chapter 18 Light 3 Menu Left Fast Rewind Headphone Transmitter Button 1 4 Return The headphone transmitter button on the remote control 5 Setup and the power button on the headphones must be turned 6 Pause Play ON before sound can be heard from the headphones On nmm 7 Mute some radios the headphone symbol will flash for ap 8 Display proximately 5 seconds in the radio display indicating the 9 Mode headphones are in use ARROW Buttons 2 3 15 16 These arrow buttons only function in CD DVD mode Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the disc menu screen options 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RTN Button 4 This button only functions in CD DVD mode Press this button to return to the previous menu when in the disc menu mode SETUP Button 5 This button only functions in CD DVD mode Press the button after pressing the STOP button to access the set up menu Use the right and left arrows to move between tabs for language rating mark audio and aspect Use the up and down arrows to move between options within each tab To change an item highlighted in blue press ENTER This should cause the highlight to turn yellow Again using the up and down arrows will cause the arrow to move up or down Once the arrow is on the desired selection press ENTER When finished press setup or play to return to playing the CD DVD or Menu to return to the disc
20. If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See Section 7 of this manual for more information 14 Cruise Indicator This display indicator shows that the Speed Control System is ON 15 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system tr called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illu minate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 16 High Beam Light This light shows that the headlights are on high 777 beam Pull the Multi Function lever towards the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 17 Navigation Screen Rear View Camera If Equipped The navigation system provides maps turn identifica
21. Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 185 Side Marker 2s s o eee 409 Tur Signal 4 eR 134 137 408 409 Voltage ua edes Paese e eene 180 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 180 Washer Ehud 2i eod kr em bas 189 Load Leveling System 00005 172 Loading Vehicle sisse 326 328 Capacities iu ceana mar cre dore e Rae deos 328 TIES iei Hiph etm Be Ge Ree Be eS 293 Locks bo LE 27 Steering Wheel ai aer peer dar 14 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH sex n RE 71 74 Lubrication Body 1 ee 381 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 169 Maintenance Airbag 0 000 eee ee 64 Maintenance Free Battery 04 376 Maintenance Procedures 0004 369 Maintenance Schedule iles 416 Schedule A7 sos sse ca yupSa Ege 430 Schedule Br u a4 e240 dee awd aah Aer iar re o 419 Maintenance Sunroof 000000 163 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 185 367 Manual Service 0 0 ee eee 442 Map Reading Lights 0 153 Memory Feature Memory Seat 127 Memory Seat asas esce masas RR Bo aed Mini Trip Computer 456 INDEX aaa MITOS CN E ETE E TRECE TITCR TOI I T 88 Automatic Dimming l l 88 Electric Remote llle 90 Exterior Folding 0 00 00 0000 0 89 Heated errio ku Paw en ay Pe E EX OE env 91 MGMOEY 4 ue eos Seis ae ahs tyne 127 Ou
22. Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811ad0d6 Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7
23. The flash cycle sequence will repeat and an audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects NOTE If a temporary spare tire is in use and none of the remaining 3 active road tire pressures are low a SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON textual message will appear in the EVIC after 10 minutes of driving CAUTION The Tire Pressure Monitoring System has been op timized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPM System as damage to the sensors may result en STARTING AND OPERATING 313 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the wheel rim sensor NOTE The Tire Pressure Monitoring System does not monitor the temporary spare tire The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly underinflated tire cause
24. Use of the Sentry Key will disable the alarm Rearming of the System If Equipped The security system will rearm itself after the 15 addi tional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing if the system has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the system will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition To Arm the System The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is arming The security light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE If the SECURITY light stays on continuously during vehicle operation have the system checked by your dealer To Disarm the System Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the door If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the security lamp will flash for 30 seconds Check the vehicle for tampering The Security system will also disarm if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key If an unpro grammed Sen
25. amplification of the band To Set The Radio Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button SET 1 will show in the display window Select the push button you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a station is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM stations to be locked into memory You can recall the stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push button twice To Change From Clock To Radio Mode Press the TIME button to change the display between radio frequency and time General Information This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE Changes or modifications not expressively ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the us
26. e The headphones will turn off automatically in ap proximately 3 minutes if they lose the signal form the system or when the radio or rear audio video system is turned off Volume Control Rotate the volume control to adjust the volume to the desired listening level es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Headphone Battery Service e Press the button at the bottom of each headphone earpiece and lift the cover upward Headphone Battery Service 812cd563 e Replace the battery in each earpiece and reinstall the cover The headphones require two AAA batteries General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If you do not hear sound coming from the headphones check for the following conditions 1 Rear Seat Audio Video System and headphones are on Press the headphone transmitter button 1 on the remote control and the power button on the headphones An indicator light will illuminate on the headphone earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON 2 Weak batteries in the headphones 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 3 Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of sight between the headphone transmitter on the video screen and
27. ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too
28. menu PAUSE PLAY Button 6 This button only functions in DVD video mode Press this button once to pause the video press a second time to play the video MUTE Button 7 No function DISP Button 8 This button only functions in DVD video mode When a DVD video is playing press this button to display the play menu options MODE Button 9 This button changes between available modes and can be heard in the headphones PROG UP DOWN Buttons 10 11 PROG UP selects the next disc loaded in the changer PROG DOWN selects the previous disc loaded in the changer es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 SLOW Button 12 This button only functions in DVD video mode Press this button to advance the video If the DVD is paused pressing this button will advance the video frame by frame STOP Button 13 This button only functions in DVD video mode Press this button to stop the DVD MENU Button 14 This button only functions in DVD video mode Press this button to select the DVD disc menu NEXT PREV Buttons 2 15 Press the up arrow or the NEXT button for the next chapter or track on the disc Press the down arrow or PREV button to return to the beginning of the current chapter or track Press the down arrow or PREV button twice within two seconds to return to the previous chapter or track Each press of the NEXT PREV button up or down will toggle through the chapters or tracks FF RW Buttons 3 16 Press a
29. obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside mirrors When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear bumper Objects can be detected from up to 59 inches 150 cm A warning display above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings indicating the distance of the object Rear Park Assist Indicator The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the vehicle The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the display above the rear window 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 1st LED 59 in 150 cm Yellow None 2nd LED 47 in 120 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 4th LED 31 5 in 80 cm 31 5 in 80 cm Yellow None 5th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 25 5 in 65 cm Yellow None 6th LED 20 in 50 cm 20 in 50 cm Yellow
30. refer to Lights in this section Service Interval When this feature is selected a service interval between 2 000 miles 3 200 km and 6 000 miles 10 000 km in 500 mile 800 km increments may be selected Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select distances between 2 000 miles 3 200 km and 6 000 miles 10 000 km in 500 mile 800 km increments 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Reset Service Distance Displays Only if Service Interval was Changed When this feature is selected the current accumulated service distance can be reset to the newly selected service interval Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Power Accessory Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system DVD video system power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle door or liftgate will cancel this feature Easy Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Pressing the STEP button when
31. turn the ignition key off 5 Wait 10 to 15 seconds and repeat steps 1 5 shown above NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be depressed to shift out of Park P Extremely Cold Weather Starting Below 20 F 29 C Follow the same instructions in the Normal Starting Process as shown above To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an LEE externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended High Altitude Starting Above 4 000 ft 1 219 m Follow the same instructions in the Normal Starting Process as shown above To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the normal starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fir
32. 0 356 E Towing A Disabled Vehicle With Ignition Key 0 00 0 0000 Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground is nud ker RS bodes oaks 358 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 0 00000 359 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER Hazard Flasher Switch A The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel above the center air outlets To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers depress the switch on the instrument panel When the Hazard Warn ing Switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer gency Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers CAUTION This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning Flash ers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city
33. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features The
34. 23 e On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the LOCK button on your key fob 3 Continue to hold the LOCK button wait at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the PANIC button Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate the feature repeat this procedure 5 If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see your authorized dealer for programming assistance To Open Close Power Liftgate If Equipped Press the LIFTGATE button twice within five seconds to open close the power liftgate The liftgate will beep for 2 seconds and then open close If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power closed the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate pressing the button will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area The liftgate will re lock automatically within 10 seconds once the liftgate is closed Flash Lights On Lock Unlock The Flash Lights With Lock or Unlock feature can be turned on or off 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Flash Lights On Lock Unlock under Use Factory Settings in the EVIC section of this manual
35. 334 Recreational lees 342 358 Weight 26 46 cs cece Ree 334 Traction Control 000 5 141 183 285 Traction Control Switch 141 285 Trailer Towing 1 6 leere 329 Cooling System Tips 0000 341 Hitches asc eds dae Re OE ea ae 333 Minimum Requirements 005 336 Trailer and Tongue Weight 335 Wiring ew bee d eR PEN EIE BESS 339 Trailer Towing Guide 0 334 Trailer Weight sec 2244 5 pex mistoa 06845 334 Transaxle scere etn nee AUR EUER CUL USER 270 Automatic 3 9 ERR DR E ES 12 270 Autostick Operation 462 INDEX a Overdfiv eck ue x EROR ER E ans 274 Selection of Lubricant 392 413 Transmission sssr eria nien Eog a ee a 392 Automate sre Sack ore y Edere x E E Arg 392 I 5 ees a s Gis of Sig Avie ig Gace 0 Bh aa das 394 Fluide day gbia dee ae kee RE eee eal E 392 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 154 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 25 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transporting Pets Tread Wear Indicators Trip Odometer iore hr Tiree RES 184 Trip Odometer Reset Button 184 Tur Signals 000 137 181 408 409 UConnect Hands Free Phone 91 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 443 Universal Joints llle 380 Universal Tran
36. 39 e The power liftgate switches will not operate if the WARNING vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison e The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your 12 F 24 bove 143 F passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep below M ic MUS edad Kd the liftgate closed when you are operating the 62 C Be sure to remove any build up of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the e If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions climate control blower switch is set at high speed within the same cycle the system will automatically DO NOT use the recirculation mode stop and must be opened or closed manually vehicle Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if equipped left and right window bags for the
37. 6 disc CD DVD changer through wireless headphones while the front seat pas sengers listen to either AM FM Cassette or CDs from the radio speakers A remote control is provided for func tions such as changing tracks or DVD functions as well as selecting discs loaded in the 6 disc CD DVD changer while listening to the Rear Audio Video System The Rear Seat Audio Video System may be available in a base and premium version The premium version in cludes a six disc changer remote control and two sets of wireless headphones The base version includes a single disc player and remote control 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The CD DVD Changer will play CD R CD RW CD Audio and DVD Video disc formats The video screen will turn on automatically once a DVD is inserted into the changer NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position before the CD DVD changer will operate gt g 6 DISC CD DVD AUTO CHANGER O VIDEO LAUDIOR o o 12 O0 811caacd Six Disc DVD Changer Operating Instructions CD DVD Changer Loading The CD DVD Changer The premium version has a multi disc changer and will accept up to six discs The base version is a single disc player and will only accept one disc ee E gj To insert disc s into the changer follow the instructions shown 1 On vehicles equipped with the premium versio
38. 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new v
39. C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle WARNING poorly The instability could cause an accident Al High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t dr
40. Door Lock move the door lock knob to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle 2 Insert the tip of the vehicle s ignition key or any similar item into the child lock control and slide it WARNING downward 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock on the opposite rear door 1 Open the rear door Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are NOTE After disengaging the child protection door lock engaged system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WINDOWS The window lock switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors When the lock switch is pressed the window controls on the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passen 2 ger windows will be disabled Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position Auto Down Feature All the power window switches have an auto down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when y
41. Equipped 167 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Inside Day Night Mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirro Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped ee ae When using this feature the mirror will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light will illuminate to indicate when this feature is on RD nour Bae 80975432 MANUAL REARVIEW MIRROR een UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Rearview Mirror omm Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and 817892c4 normal Automatic Dimming Mirror C Outside Mirror Driver s Side CAU
42. Hill 6 25 aceon eGo ree IRR 277 Passing Light 2 22 pxRE E RR ARIS 138 Pedals Adjustable niies petia tai 148 Pets Transporting el eee ea bw es 78 Phone Cellular cece eee 91 Phone Hands Free UConnect 91 Placard Tire and Loading Information 293 Power Brakes esee v ER er ERR ewe Es 278 Distribution Center Fuses 402 Door Locks 22 2 kR 9 e be RE ets 28 Lift Gate ise RR E NR 37 MIEIOIS ako reed Eae iw Poe bcm eii da 90 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 163 OealS casco s hee S par ea eG Pee 114 115 StEETiINE DET 286 Steering Checking 229 x RE 379 SUnEOO f iea a n aa S NUR PAS e Res 160 MW ndOWS so ie eae s PRE ASG Beene es gus 33 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 49 Preparation for Jacking 00 349 Pretensioners Seat Belts wro seems Ee ae Ea 47 Programmable Electronic Features 155 159 193 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 25 155 159 Radial Ply Tires 20042 ue e Ga oe ea eS as 300 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 384 386 Radio Broadcast Signals 4 200 Radio Operation xa eec RR es 240 Radio Remote Controls Ls 224237 Radio Satellite ee eee Radio Sound Systems 458 INDEX aaa Rear Camera cosac ae dre ce al a Gre ata ade eo Reina 146 Rear Liftgate ess 24 e09 Lene Sane ena 4 35 Rear Seating Flexibility
43. Ibs 1587 kg 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission GCWR Gross Com bined Wt Rating Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 3 5L amp 3 8L Auto matic 8 600 Ibs 3900 kg 40 SQ FT Up to 2 persons amp Luggage 3 500 Ibs 1600 kg 350 Ibs 158 kg 8 600 Ibs 3900 kg 40 SQ FT 3 to 4 persons amp Luggage 3 000 Ibs 1360 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg 8 600 Ibs 3900 kg 40 SQ FT 5 to 6 persons amp Luggage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information Section in this manual Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow
44. Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 29 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the YA Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is re quired and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 30 All Wheel Drive Failure Indicator Light If AWD equipped This light monitors the AWD sy
45. Interior Lights 0 0 0 0 00 00 00a ee 134 Multi Function Lever 0 000 134 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel Windshield Wiper Operation 139 ee ii eni fide Intermittent Wiper System 139 Automatic Headlights 136 Rear Window Wiper Washer 139 Daytime Running Lights Canada Only 136 Wi Tilt Steering Column Lights On Reminder 136 Bl Electronic Stability Program ESP Headlight Time Delay 136 Traction Control Switch TCS If Equipped 141 Fog Lights If Equipped 137 W Rear Park Assist System If Equipped 143 Turn Signals o ci0se nies cee Hed Xx EA 137 W Rear Camera If Equipped 146 Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch 138 W Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 148 Passing Lights darsin neran RP eae 138 W Electronic Speed Control 00 0 150 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 138 To Ac vate so 002 ERR E REY EE 150 Windshield Washers 0 06 138 To Set At A Desired Speed 151 Mist Feature zu nies exe EE e aes 139 To Deactivate sy csr 0d uem re 151 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se
46. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin catalyst as an emission control device ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control sys tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for p
47. Liter Engines Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 10 7 qts 10 1 liters 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 8 Liter Engines Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 11 8 qts 11 2 liters 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent 4 0 Liter Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 engine oil refer to oil viscosity chart for cor rect SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 3 8 Liter Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil Refer to your oil filler cap for cor rect SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com artment Oil Filter 4 0 3 8 Liter Engines Mopar 5281090 or equiv Fuel Selection 89 Octane ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid AWD Power Transfer Unit Mopar Gear Lubricant 75W 90 or equivalent AWD Rear Carrier Mopar Gear Lubricant 75W 90 or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J170
48. Lock Brake System TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation and ESP Electronic Stability Program All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP The ESP system enhances directional control and stabil ity of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP corrects for over under steering of the vehicle by apply ing the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the Over steer or Under steer condition e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during accelerati
49. OFF FF TUNE RW Press FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner RND Random Play Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks Press the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward feature If TUNE RW is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CD DVD Changer Operation Press the MODE button to select between the CD player and the optional remote CD DVD changer Time Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported media disc types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported medium formats file systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When read
50. OFF button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push and release the ACCEL RESUME button Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is set speed can be increased by pressing and holding the ACCEL RESUME button When the button is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the ACCEL RESUME button once will result in a 2 mph 3 km h speed increase Each time the button is tapped speed increases so that tapping the button three times will increase speed by 6 mph 10 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is set press and hold the COAST button Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Tapping the COAST button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descend ing downhill This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to mai
51. X X X RE Replace the engine air cleaner filter X X y Replace the spark plugs X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Front amp Rear X 1 Check the PCV valve and replace if necessary Not re X M quired if previously changed dd Inspect the serpentine drive belt replace if necessary X X z Change the All Wheel Drive power transfer unit fluid X X 8 See the note at the end of this chart Change the All Wheel Drive AWD rear carrier fluid X See note at the end of this chart Replace the air conditioning filter X nn SCHEDULE B 425 Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 100 000 102 000 105 000 Kilometers 149 000 154 000 158 000 160 000 163 000 168 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate Tires X X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary X X X X Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace engine timing belt X Change the All Wheel Drive AWD power transfer unit X fluid See note at the end of this chart Change the All Wheel Drive AWD rear carrier fluid X See note at the end of this chart Inspect the serpentine drive belt replace if necessary 1 X Flush and replace the engine coolant X Replace the air conditioning filter X Engine Coolant Flush and replace at 5 years of 100 000 X miles whichever occurs first M A l N T
52. a NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 Tet 1 on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCI upr NEVER EXCEED XXX B pillar TIRE ER P195 70R14 T125 70D15 INFLATION PRI 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry amp iTadod 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Tire Placard Location 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual T
53. a reminder to remove the key Auto Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled The transmission is in gear All doors are closed The throttle is pressed If you press the power door lock switch while the key is The doors were not previously locked using the power in the ignition and any front door is open the power 1 2 3 4 Power Door Lodi Switch 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 If desired the Auto Door Locks feature can be turned on or off by using the following procedure e On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Auto Door Locks under Use Factory Settings in the EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps Auto Door Locks Programming 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver
54. a visual check of the rear area NOTE CHECK ENTIRE SURROUNDINGS before backing up 5 Backup as necessary 6 Place the sift lever in P Park or D Drive to exit the Rear Backup Camera system es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when e To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Camera System using the Rear Camera System Always check care should only be used as a parking aid and is unable fully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for to view every obstacle or object in your drive path pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must con tinue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Camera System to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver look over his her shoulder when using the Rear Camera System NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steeri
55. adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed WARNING If you are required to drive with the deck lid liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the LED is not lit during starting have it checked If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear pattern
56. and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield and Rear Window Washers The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for
57. appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 As soon as you turn your
58. are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC and impact sensors detects a collision requiring the air bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occupant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s and passenger s front airbag gas is vented through the airbag material towards the instrument panel In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC and the side impact sensors with side impact option detects a collision requiring the window bags to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the window bag The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it ta
59. are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations RIGHT STOP TURN HE Bx LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN PINS PARK Hb GND 4 Pin Connector MALE PIN 813262be RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP o TURN ELECTRIC GROUND 0 BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater
60. as indicated by the M S designation on the tire side wall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE E Ed Ew
61. ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook EN NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e When
62. exten 160 128 144 I sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 MPEG 2 Audio 5 9995 46 112 96 80 64 Fu Layer 3 56 48 40 32 24 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files supported use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Playback of MP3 files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to us
63. file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files supported use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Playback of MP3 files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing
64. file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported medium formats file systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension wn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after cation quency kHz Bit rate kbps writing are most likely multisession discs The use of 320 256 224 multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 longer disc loading times Layer 3 48 44 1 32 112 96 80 64 Supported MP3 file formats 56 48 40 32 The radio will recognize only files with the mp3
65. filter X X X X X X Rotate Tires X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if X X X X X necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Front X amp Rear Check the PCV valve and replace if neces X sary Inspect the serpentine drive belt replace if nec X X essary 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 X months or 100 000 miles whichever occurs first Replace the air conditioning filter X X X gt Z l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 432 SCHEDULE A MSE Miles 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 100 000 Kilometers 125 000 134 000 144 000 154 000 160 000 Months 78 84 90 96 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate Tires X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X X X X sary Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Front amp X Rear Check and replace the PCV valve if necessary X Inspect the serpentine drive belt replace if neces X sary f Replace the spark plugs X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months X or 100 000 miles whichever comes first Replace the air conditioning filter X X ne SCHEDUL
66. for the entire United States and parts of Canada is stored in the DVD unit Updated DVD s are available from your authorized dealer Navigation DVD Location To replace the navigation map DVD lift the storage bin cover and liner in the rear cargo area press the eject button and the disc will eject Gently insert the new disc into the DVD unit with the label facing up The disc will automatically be pulled into the DVD unit SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se System Activation To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following informa tion available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to
67. in the radio while in the Satellite or radio mode Seek Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either the AM FM or Satellite mode Press the top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding the button in will by pass stations without stopping until you release it Tuning Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency If you press and hold the button the radio will continue to tune until you release the button The frequency will be displayed and continu ously updated while the button is pressed Balance The Balance control adjusts the left to right speaker bal ance Press the AUDIO button select BALANCE then press SEEK or SEEK to adjust the balance Fade The Fade control provides for balance between the front and rear speakers Press the AUDIO button select FADE then press SEEK or SEEK to adjust the fade balance es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Tone Control The Bass and or Treble controls sound for the desired tone Press the AUDIO button select Bass or TREBLE then press SEEK or SEEK to increase or decrease amplification of the band To Set The Radio Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button SET 1 will show in the display window Select the push button you
68. key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station TheI M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or f
69. language is deleted ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 After confirmation the phonebook entries will be de leted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and then say Call NOTE the user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service pro
70. may not If the airbags and seat belt pretensioners deploy after an function properly if modifications are made Take your impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including re automatically In addition approximately 10 seconds moval or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufac will illuminate until the ignition switch is turned off turer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for per sons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING e You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags Airbag Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The
71. of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning telltale has been illuminated the tire pressure must be in NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the creased to the recommended cold placard pressure in tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and too main order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System warning tain the proper pressure telltale to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System warning telltale will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received e Receiver Module The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 e 4 Wheel Sensors minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp 310 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp l will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each low tire condition that it detects Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each
72. of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg 296 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 865 ibs 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 ibs Occupant 2 200 ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 81ta4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire fa
73. only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided other than what was originally equipped on your wear vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose e Vehicle pull to right or left control and have an accident e Fast tire wear Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer for proper diagnosis Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad equate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of CAUTION balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following avoid tire cupping and spotty wear precautions Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other TIRE CHAINS suspension components it is important that only chains in i f good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of prop
74. position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 8 Traction Control Indicator If Equipped This display indicator illuminates momentarily as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON The traction control Indicator will turn on if e The traction control system is in use e The Traction Control switch has been used to turn the system OFF e There is a Traction Control System malfunction e The system has been deactivated to prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated brake tem peratures NOTE Extended heavy use of Traction Control may cause the system to deactivate and turn on the Traction Control Light This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is a normal condition The system will remain 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled The system will automatically reactivate and turn off the Traction Control Light 9 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 10 Trip Odometer Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings The word TRIP and either A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode P
75. prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON positions and the brake pedal is depressed SENTRY KEY IF EQUIPPED The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indica
76. prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile or pager Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
77. released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn OFF Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever to the second detent for Low speed wiper operation or to the third detent for High speed operation Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval The delay can be regu lated from a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second Rear Window Wiper Washer The switch on the right side of the steering column also controls operation of the rear wiper washer function 80eb7f6a Windshield Wiper Washer Control 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rotating the center of the switch up to the DEL Delay position or the ON position will activate the rear wiper Push the lever forward to initiate the rear wash function in any of the three positions The washer pump will continue
78. required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements 332 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING EXAMPLE ONLY An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT 81811965 Weight Distributing Hitch System ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT 8181t96f Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500
79. shut off the air flow from these outlets Bi Level Mode Bi Level Outlets UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is also directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the bi level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Floor Mode Floor Outlets Mix Outlets Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is Air comes from the floor defrost and side window directed through the defrost and side window demister demist outlets This mode is not used when operating in outlets either AUTO HI or AUTO LO This mode should be used when airflow to the floor and windshield is desired Defrost Mode Defrost Outlets Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this setting when necessary to defrost your windshield and side windows If a fog or mist on the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility press the front blower button and increase the fan speed to maximum NOTE While operating in AUTO HI or AUTO LO the system will not automatically sense the presence fog mist or ice on the windshield The defrost button must be pressed to clear the windshield and side glass Depress
80. spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or ESP Off modes The ESP TCS Indicator Lamp located in the instrument cluster will light up when the Traction Control is in use To turn the system OFF press the ESP OFF switch located on center console next to the ash tray until the Traction Control Indicator in the instrument cluster lights up Traction Control Switch To turn the system back ON press the switch a second time until the Traction Control Indicator turns OFF ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 NOTE e The Traction Control Indicator comes on each time the ignition switch is turned ON This will occur even if you used the switch to turn the system OFF e The Traction Control system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when in operation REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system is used to help drivers determine if an
81. than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 344 B If Your Engine Overheats 345 H Jacking And Tire Changing 346 Jack Location sectes ceria ioen a eee ee 346 Spare Tire Stowage e as rosane au paean 348 Preparations For Jacking 349 Jacking Instructions s see pi tai mati 350 H Jump Starting Procedure 00 0 354 Bl Freeing A Stuck Vehicle
82. that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Cruise control status Traction stability control status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a seat appropriate for their age and size According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint
83. the A C button to turn on and off the air conditioning during manual operation only Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected by the Mode Control To turn off the air condi tioning press the A C button a second time The A C symbol in the display will turn off NOTE If a fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass press the A C button to engage the com pressor or press the defrost button If a fog or mist on the 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility press the front blower button and increase the fan speed to maximum Recirculation Control When the outside air contains smoke odors CS high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the recirculation button The recircu lation mode should only be used temporarily The recir culate symbol will illuminate in the display when this button is selected Push the button a second time to allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of the recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected A C Recirculation Programming The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF and will reset
84. the cassette tape away from direct sunlight heat and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers 4 Before inserting a tape make sure that the label is adhering flat to the cassette 5 A loose tape should be corrected before use To rewind a loose tape insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions Maintain your cassette tape player The head and capstan shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape deposits each time a cassette is played The result of deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap around and become lodged in the tape transport The other adverse condition is low or muddy sound from one or both channels as if the treble tone control were turned all the way down To prevent this you should periodically clean the head with a commercially available WET cleaning cassette As preventive maintenance clean the head about every 30 hours of use If you wait until the head becomes very dirty noticeably poor sound it may not be possible to remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels o
85. the fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is selected or by pushing the blower switch and manually adjusting the fan speed This feature may be disabled using the following proce dure e Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto LO buttons for 5 seconds e The DELAY symbol will flash to indicate that the feature as been disabled es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 This feature may be enabled using the following proce dure e Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto HI buttons for 5 seconds e The DELAY symbol will flash to indicate that the feature as been enabled Power Button This button turns the entire system ON OFF When the system is turned on it will return to the previous settings Dual Single Zone Operation When DUAL is displayed in the ATC control unit the driver and passenger air outlet temperatures can be individually adjusted from the two independent TEMP buttons When a front seat passenger is not present pressing the DUAL button will match the passenger s temperature setting to the driver s temperature setting This will help equalize air outlet temperatures across the left and right side of the instrument panel The outside temperature will replace the passenger s temperature setting in the display Pressing the DUAL button a second time or adjusting the passenger s TEMP button will return the system to dual independent temperature operation Man
86. the headphones Operating Instructions MP3 Player Portable Walkman An MP3 player can be connected to the audio system Connect the cables to the RCA jacks located on the front of the CD DVD changer NOTE Follow the manufactures instructions for the correct colors when connecting the RCA cables Operating Instructions Video Games Camcorders A video game unit or camcorder can be connected to the rear audio video system Connect the cables to the RCA jacks located on the front of the CD DVD changer NOTE To operate a video game unit a DC to AC adapter may be required plug the adapter into any power outlet Follow the manufactures instructions for the correct colors when connecting the RCA cables NOTE MP3 player s video game systems camcorders connected to the RCA jacks and CD s or DVD s inserted into the radio can be heard through the headphones or the cabin when AUX Mode is selected NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The navigation system provides maps turn identifica tion selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes The buttons to operate the system are located on the instrument panel next to the analog clock Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 The navigation DVD unit is located in the underfloor storage compartment in the rear cargo area A single disc containing map information
87. the vehicle is parked Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position Release the bar to lock the seat into position Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Second Row Bench Seating If Equipped The second row seats may be used with either or both seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space To fold the seat remove any objects from in front of or on the seat Then pull handle located on the seatback and push the seatback forward Seatback Release Handle To raise the second row seat lift up on the seatback and push rearward until the seatback is latched Move the seatback forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 CAUTION Be sure there is nothing in front of the second row seat cushion before folding it down Damage to the seat may occur Second Row Fold amp Tumble Seats If Equipped The second row seats can be folded and tumbled forward for easy access to the third seat or rear ca
88. the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle e Continue to rotate the nut until you hear the mecha nism click three times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire several times to be sure it is securely in place 13 Stow the jack and jack handle 14 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct pressure as required 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME NOTE When reinstalling the wheel center cap insure that the valve stem symbol on the back of the cap is pointed toward the wheel valve stem Install the center cap using hand pressure only Do not use a hammer Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles of operation and after each time a tire is changed to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the nut opposite to the nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved Recommended torque is 130 N m 95 ft Ibs JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started
89. this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 Check the Battery Test Indicator if equipped If a light or bright colored dot is visible in the indicator if equipped DO NOT jump start the battery If the indicator if equipped is dark or shows a green dot proceed as follows 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another vehic
90. tire 292 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Identification Number TIN located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted however the date code may only be on one side Tires with on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 293 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location
91. transfer X unit fluid See note at the end of this chart Change the All Wheel Drive AWD rear carrier X fluid See note at the end of this chart Replace the air conditioning filter X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 428 SCHEDULE B ME unit fluid See note at the end of this chart Miles 138 000 141 000 144 000 147 000 150 000 Kilometers 221 000 226 000 230 000 235 000 240 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate Tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X X X X sary Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs X Inspect the serpentine drive belt replace if neces X sary f Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Front amp X Rear Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary X Change the All Wheel Drive AWD power transfer X en SCHEDULE B 429 Miles 138 000 141 000 144 000 147 000 150 000 Kilometers 221 000 226 000 230000 235 000 240 000 Change the All Wheel Drive AWD rear carrier X fluid See note at the end of this chart Replace the air conditioning filter X This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture NOTE The AWD power transfer unit fluid an
92. turn on for 3 seconds then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals For the first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights and security telltale will flash repeatedly For an addi tional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale will flash The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key is used to start the vehicle
93. will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push button Tape Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next selection on the cassette Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second selection three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition take the following precautions 1 Do not use cassette tapes longer than C 90 otherwise sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin ished 2 Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from slackness and dust when it is not in use 3 Keep
94. window path before closing E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Reset Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the auto up function will be disabled To reactivate the auto up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE NOTE The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate To open the liftgate insert the key into the lock and turn to the right On vehicles equipped with power locks the liftgate can also be unlocked using the remote keyles
95. with a single chime FOB LINKED with a single chime FOB UNLINKED with a single chime PARK BRAKE ENGAGED with a single chime LOW BRAKE FLUID with a single chime LOW FUEL with a single chime MENU IN PARK ONLY LIST ALERT MESSAGES UNLOCK TO OPEN LIFTGATE with a single chime PUT IN PARK FOR LIFTGATE with a single chime TOO COLD FOR PWR LIFTGATE with a single chime TOO HOT FOR PWR LIFTGATE with a single chime PERFORM SERVICE with a single chime LEFT RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph LEFT RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph DOOR S AJAR with a single chime DOOR S AND GATE AJAR with a single chime LIFT GATE AJAR with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph WASHER FLUID LOW with a single chime PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED CRUISE ENGAGED PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED VEHICLE IN REVERSE CHANNEL 1 2 OR 3 TRANSMIT with a single chime CHANNEL 1 2 OR 3 TRAINING with a single chime CHANNEL 1 2 OR 3 TRAINED with a single chime ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 e CLEARING CHANNELS Customer Programmable Features If Equipped e CHANNELS CLEARED Press the MENU button until one of the following display choices appears e CHANNELS DEFAULTED Language e DID NOT TRAIN When in this display you may select one of three lan f guages for all display nomenclature including the trip 1 23 OR 4 TIRE S LOW PRESSURE R
96. 0 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belt buckles for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners are designed to work for all size occupants NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con trol module see Airbag Section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten sioners both must be replaced 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert Driver Front Seat Only If the occupied driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The d
97. 00000 139 Zone Control Temperature Control 242 NOTES
98. 02 Garage Door Opener Homelink9 154 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 321 323 366 Gasoline Clean Air llle 318 Gasoline Pael isses dod ses tsarene dt Eras 318 Gasoline Reformulated 000 319 Gauges Coolant Temperature 00 180 FUE Cr 181 Speedometer scssi Sart n E REA X ties 181 Tachometer 25e ERES DENEN MS 184 Gearshift fais wes oe Ree Re b ae Ele ERR 272 General Information 00 18 26 317 Glass Cleaning 6 6 eee 400 Grocery Bag Retainer 0005 126 Gross Axle Weight Rating 327 330 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 327 330 Hands Free Phone UConnect 91 Hazard Warning Flasher 54 344 Head Phones 43 essem ae chek Ghee he ES RS 230 Head Restraints 2e Mgt gowns 115 Headlights 24 i2 2344 9 44 PIA ee Res 407 Bulb Replacement 004 406 High Beati 42er su eru A 138 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 138 PASSING 224 264 eet ade O6 gore eneki eres 138 en INDEX 453 Replacing i nil qs e EI Brees al a doe aces 406 owitchi sio ee pee dedteediaebadaneis 135 Time Delay 4vosessacex RR URS yk kent op 136 Heated Seats ia ene ceo deu eee ewes 116 PCA LOE uo dessen a aeos di en aig deben e te 241 Heater Engine Block 0 050 270 Hitches Trailer Towing 6 0 0 0 cece eee 333 Holder Cup susuga rd Da e RP RR 165 HomeL
99. 15 Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed note below follow the step noted e Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash and the EVIC display shows Channels Cleared after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Pro gramming Step Two Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds and the EVIC display will show Channel X Transmit where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 for 20 seconds and then change to Channel X Training Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Programming Step Two 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Security If you sell your vehicle be sure to erase the frequencies by following the Erasing HomeLink Buttons instruc tions in this section This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference tha
100. 2 0 ce ees 369 Defroster Rear Window 259 Defroster Windshield 80 246 255 Delay Intermittent Wipers llle 139 Diagnostic System Onboard 366 Digital Video Disc DVD Player 221 Dimmer Switch Headlight 138 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission ls 393 Oil Engine oo ic eee m ma n 369 Disabled Vehicle Towing 004 357 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 386 Engine Qil prince ieee eed Shee eig Door Ajar Light 2 sees edere e Gow ay heel DOOr LOCKS 2 4 pier DRE ded E ode eder Door Locks Automatic lees Door Opener Garage iw epee deans er ae tes Drive Belts 2 0 0 cee ee eee Drive Shaft Universal Joints 450 INDEX aaa Driving On Slippery Surfaces 0000 287 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 221 B65 Fuel cose cae dee oo dees eee ees 324 Electric Remote Mirrors 00 90 Electrical Power Outlets 00 163 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 150 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 146 191 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher 344 Jacking zgdgstece nme aie ach dev dar e Pp seeds 346 Jump Starting 2 440 406 ew EE EA RES 354 Overheating i e acce Ee t are he bee acs 345 Emission Control System Maintenance 367 416 Engine xen repe ear d ec x he amb DER RR
101. 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Se STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts e Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause ex cessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause seri ous or fatal injuries NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death es STARTING AND OPERATING 267 Automatic Transmission The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Depress the brake pedal before shifting into any driving gear Normal Starting Above 32 F 0 C 1 Do not depress the accelerator 2 Turn and hold the ignition key in the START position and release when engine starts 3 If engine does not start after 3 seconds depress the accelerator lightly while still cranking the engine 4 If engine does not start after 15 seconds
102. 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A of the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all lj types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 4 0 Liter Engines The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be selected based on the following recommendation and be within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil viscosity chart 20 0 10 20 32 60 80 29 48 12 7 0 16 27 Temperature range anticipated before next oil change e SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred SAE 5W 30 engine oil is allowed during cold weather only to improve cold weather starting Lubricants wh
103. 3 should be used Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 or Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 416 Schedule B 22 scecsyee ea ee ces Bl Maintenance Schedules 000 416 Schedule A rios adu dotun tyb RUE S M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulat
104. 364 365 Au Cleaner ase xem E BER ae eki 375 Air Cleaner Filter 00 0000 374 Block Heater 0 00000 cee eee 270 Break In Recommendations 79 Checking Oil Level 4352s eee 369 Compartment se srs vedo EXER ds 364 365 Coolant Antifreeze llle 412 Cooling usce pee dn UR dae ees 383 Exhaust Gas Caution 0005 39 321 Flooded Starting 00000 268 Fuel Requirements 06 318 411 Qil erus aee be RR Ge ae 369 411 412 Oil Change Interval lees 371 Oil Disp sal 22 cet mem oe op eee es OR 373 Oil Fillet Cap oz scefeeea ede yo 372 373 Oil Filter Disposal e er red e RR ER 373 Oil Selection lees 371 411 Qil Syntheti iis scing eI deca E eI 373 Overheating sr ierre masea s se Reno rS tes 345 Temperature Gauge lt ee creesereseiest ses 180 Event Data Recorder lees 65 Exhaust Gas Caution 39 79 321 383 en INDEX 451 Exhaust System ue Gee alah te ghee ald bk Be ng 382 Extender Seat Belt 0 0 0 0 0 c eee ene 49 Exterior Folding Mirrors 205 89 Filters Air Cleaner oi gh ean rer Gh ee Re 374 Air Conditioning 0040 259 379 Automatic Transaxle 000000 394 Engine Of 2 2 2 ee ee be m gn 374 412 Engine Oil Disposal 04 373 Flashers Hazard Warning ss surus serek pusini ess 344 Turn Signal aceon 6 karesan ieaie 181 408 409 Flexible Fuel V
105. AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the airbag control mod ule may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an airbag deployment your vehicle is designed to record up to 2 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys and are otherwise unavailable In conjunction with other 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee data gathered during a complete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corpo ration such investigations may be requested by custom ers insurance carriers government officials an
106. Adding Fuel ilex eraty ou evades 321 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 0 0 321 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 323 Bi Flexible Fuel Fleet Vehicles Only 324 E 85 General Information 324 Ethanol Fuel E 85 000 324 Fuel Requirements llle 324 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 325 Staring icis mao inspeksi ex 325 Cruising Ranpe 044 eee re 326 Replacement Parts 326 260 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Maintenances su rper SE ed 326 B Vehicle Loading 5 352 s 326 Vehicle Certification Label sen 327 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 327 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 327 Overloading 4x CER UReEexY Re E EE 328 Loading cas etm estet en Bena nnd d on 328 B ule Towing sore e Rare ERR ROT OR 329 Common Towing Definitions 330 Trailer Hitch Classification 333 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 334 Trailer And Tongue Weight 335 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Towing Requirements 04 336 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Ti 340 Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The di IM Tae rene ea eee Ground 4 ace access dew Ge eae s 342 ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 342
107. CLE xe Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition switch a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key Locking Doors With The Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward to unlock the door turn the key forward See Section 7 of this manual for door lock lubrication STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle with out the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved no more than 1 2 turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition switch the steering wheel will lock If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel With the engine running turn the steering wheel upside down turn off the engine and remove the key Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine If the key is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system
108. Cupholders If Equipped There are cupholders located in each rear trim panel for the third row seat passengers STORAGE Console Features The center consoles may be equipped with a tissue holder mounted on the underside of the cover The bottom of the console bins may also have built in holders for compact discs or cassette tapes Rear Cargo Storage Bin If Equipped The storage bin is located in the floor of the rear cargo area To open lift up on the handle Rear Storage Bin es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped To cover the cargo area 1 Fold down the third row seatbacks 2 Unfold the cargo cover extensions and lock into place 3 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots located on the trim panel behind the second row seat backs 4 Grasp the center portion of the cover flap Pull it over the cargo area 5 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the slots on the rear trim panel 6 The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo cover in place WARNING In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle Stowed Position 1 Fold down the third row se
109. DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT f TRACTION SAFETY K pat STANDARDS bx Y TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 290 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on Europe
110. E A 433 Miles 102 000 108 000 114 000 120 000 Kilometers 163 000 173 000 182 000 192 000 Months 102 108 114 120 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate Tires X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary X X X Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace engine timing belt X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Front amp Rear X Check the PCV valve and replace if necessary X Inspect the serpentine drive belt replace if necessary 1 X X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months if not X done at 100 000 miles 160 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 434 SCHEDULE A Se M A N Miles 126 000 132 000 138 000 144 000 150 000 l Kilometers 202 000 211 000 221000 230000 240 000 W Months 126 132 138 144 150 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X H Rotate Tires X X X X X E Inspect the brake linings X X E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X X X X IM sary i Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Il Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Front amp Rear X T Check the PCV valve and replace if necessary X M Inspect the serpentine d
111. E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 426 SCHEDULE B NENNEN Miles 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 Kilometers 173 000 178 000 182 000 187 000 192 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate Tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X X X X sary Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Front amp X Rear Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary X Inspect the serpentine drive belt replace if neces X sary f Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter X Change the All Wheel Drive AWD power transfer X unit fluid See note at the end of this chart Replace the air conditioning filter X X nn SCHEDULE B 427 Miles 123 000 126 000 129 000 132 000 135 000 Kilometers 197 000 202 000 206 000 211000 216 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate Tires X X Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X X X X sary Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Inspect the serpentine drive belt replace if neces X sary f Change the All Wheel Drive AWD power
112. E 125 WARNING Load Floor If Equipped For additional cargo space the second and third row Not all head restraints in this vehicle are the same seatbacks may be folded forward and the load floor Head restraints from one seating position should extended to cover the center console not be removed and installed in any other seating position In a collision serious injury or death may To extend the load floor follow these steps omm result if the proper head restraint is not installed on each seat The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle should not 2 Fold the second and third row seatbacks down be used as a play area by children They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system 1 Move the second row seats to the full rear position It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Pull on the load floor strap and lift the panel from the Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer driver s second row seatback over the center console and Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag onto the passenger second
113. E FUEL Fleet Vehicles Only E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by the unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 ETHANOL FUEL E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two en STARTING AND OPERATING 325 For best results a refueling pattern that alternates be tween E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuels it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling e you operate the vehicl
114. E gt 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED e The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The placard is located on the drivers side B Pillar The tire pressure will vary with the temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure NOTE Refer to Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 e The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will Tire Pressure Monitoring Base System without warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If pressure falls below the low pressure warning thresh Equipped old for any reason including low temperature effects The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Re ceiver Module The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will continue to warn the driver
115. ENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 1 3 2 4 34156 71 8 9 1 15 14 13 10 12 12 1 Air Outlets 7 Passenger Airbag Disable Light 13 Ignition Switch 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Climate Controls 14 Theft Alarm Immobilizer Light 3 Electronic Vehicle Information Center 9 Radio 15 Trip Odometer Button 4 Navigation System 10 Glove Box If Equipped 5 Analog Clock 11 CD DVD Player 6 Hazard Switch 12 Power Outlets 8158bd19 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Li 8 9 Q9 A Pd m wr ww E 5 A ENS BRAKE e 140 oe B 3 DER I EE p M WS D co BRINDLE EOD d TIS 819218cb UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 E 70 Munere o 110 tU a Se 6i 120 v Y b NX US e Navi igation Soroen Area quippe 1 Neo P ig S L PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER aN f dw i f Xe E a Wii RPM e Cm Syd 3 c PENS peek M s i T ir bt Tare I 8192193b km h x1000 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS CAUTION 1 Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over in a safe area as soon as p
116. GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact ing sequi spare tire Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or ire i i ac system of your vehicle with that of the trailer Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe ee y and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with el
117. LE M REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Center amp Rear Reading Lights 578 Front Door Courtesy Light 578 Liftgate Light s s mos a a llle ai 578 Overhead Console Reading Lights 212 2 Visor Vanity Lights 0 V26377 NOTE For lighted switches see your dealer for replace ment instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Backsip dese qose st ura a E anes a aus 921 Rear Stop Tum Signal 3157 Rear Sidemarker 00000 cee ues 168 Fog Light Jis recente beth e 9145 Front Tum Signal sees ee eee 3157A Front Sidemarker llle 194 Standard Headlight H13 LICENSE uus sete RUE ane e turd TR S dL an 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Standard Quad Headlights 1 Remove the two screws securing the headlight mod ule to the vehicle and pull the headlight module forward away from the vehicle disengaging the assembly from the lower attachment clip ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 80f67f3e 2 Disconnect the electrical connector 3 Remove the rubber boot seals 4 Rotate the bulb to the left and replace the bulb Reinstall the rubber boot seals and then the headlight module CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your finge
118. LET Low PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE 58 wo l a 2D b 3 e y AJ QU D BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT WINDOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE HOS HOME OS ww e 4 e od C 4 a E Uv FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM D e Ns CS r5 v 4WD BRAKE WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE Toa N ER e Ult poU VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON ig d a CO 2 DAN wy oy LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT HAZARD STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON SRS NX 3 on AIRBAG Pa pun agilis MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGE
119. NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Wheel Sensors e Wheel Sensor Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will show a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 NOTE A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the chime to sound Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is are flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold plac ard pressure value The system will automatically up date the graphic display of the pressure va
120. None 7th LED 16 in 40 cm 16 in 40 cm Red at 12 in 30 cm Intermittent 8th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30 cm Red at 8 in 20 cm Continuous NOTE The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the radio if on when the audible warning is activated es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING CAUTION e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when e To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Park Assist using the Rear Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Before using the Rear Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle System should only be used as a parking aid and is unable to recognize every obstacle including small objects Parking curb
121. ONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 30 mph 50 km h The speed control switches are located on the steering wheel 80e550b1 Speed Control Switches To Activate Push the ON OFF button once and the CRUISE indi cator located near the instrument cluster odometer will illuminate showing the electronic speed control system is on To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button again and the system and indicator will turn off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidently set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you aren t using it ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press and release the SET button Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed The CRUISE SET indicator located near the instrument clus ter odometer will illuminate showing the electronic speed control is set NOTE While in the AutoStick mode Speed Control will only function in third or fourth gear To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal braking while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the memory Pushing the ON
122. R DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 81916970 INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO e 6 INTRODUCTION EE WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the Auto n d 808ce9e3 mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window VIN Location on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN es INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys 005 12 Ignition Key Removal 00 12 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 Locking Doors With The Key 14 ll Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped
123. RNING The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that oper A moving garage door can cause injury to people and ate devices such as garage door openers motorized pets in the path of the door People or pets could be gates or home lighting It triggers these devices at the seriously or fatally injured Only use this transceiver push of a button The Universal Transceiver operates off with a garage door opener that has a stop and your vehicle s battery and charging system no batteries reverse feature as required by federal safety stan are needed dards This includes most garage door opener mod NOTE The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is dis els menace ames Tbe Dounot ase a garage abled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm 19 896 door opener without these safety features it could cause injury or death Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 For additional information on HomeLink call 1 800 or on the Internet at www homelink com for safety 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com information or assistance ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run the vehicle s exhaust while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transcei
124. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE E INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE cece eee hh hh nn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2c cece ccc ccc c ccc hh hh nnn Fs STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc cece cece cece r eer hs hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 ce ccc cece cece eee c eee e eee eee i hn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ccc ccc cece t isuri nke REEERE EEEE 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ccc ccc cw ccc cece reer eee e eee e reece hn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE cece cece cece cece vere hm hm 10 INDEX 5 83 ao i me Ree evra 27 Ropa Ce Tos are Eos S pL E teres 6 wine are c 8 0 Sate ele 8 M09 620 one E 3 arp S08 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS H introduction 0 0 0 0 00 cee ee 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 E How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 05 6 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation o
125. TION Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning inside mirror never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to the vehicle This type of mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Power Remote Conirol Mirrors Use the mirror select switch located on the driver s door trim panel above the power window switches to adjust the view obtained in the outside mirrors Power Mirror Switches es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Press the rocker switch to the L or R for Left or Right mirror selection Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Select a mirror and press one of the four
126. Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Latch Plate 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Ws A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Rib
127. a few seconds to flush out the residual water The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates Washer Fluid Reservoir Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is Cooling System damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken WARNING damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis to seep into the passenger compartment In addition connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature for lubrication or oil change Replace as required controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot WARNING Exhaust gases can injur
128. adlights 406 High Intensity Discharge Headlights HID It Equipped 2 3 adh esni een hte te es 407 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Front Park Turn Signal And Sidemarker H Fluids And Capacities oc seaweed shee wees 411 Pigh sese et see edet dedita Sea eh 4108 Mi Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 412 M M E id Engine ouoir rrarena 412 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker And Back Up Lights sese 409 Chassis a vee dua EE Ge ER RE A 413 License Light 3e aa dee ead UE ERE 410 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 0L ENGINES AIR CLEANER BRAKE MASTER COOLANT COOLANT INTEGRATED FILTER CYLINDER BOTTLE PRESSURE CAP POWER MODULE AUTOMATIC POWER STEERING ENGINE ENGINE OIL N WASHER BATTERY TRANSMISSIO FLUID CHECK OIL FILL FLUID CHECK DIPSTICK BOTTLE m Engine Compartment 4 0L Engine ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 3 8L ENGINES AIR CLEANER BRAKE MASTER COOLANT HE INTEGRATED FILTER CYLINDER BOTTLE OSURE POWER MODULE AUTOMATIC POWER STEERING ENGINE OIL ENGINE WASHER FLUID CHECK FLUID CHECK OIL FILL TRANSMISSION BOTTLE iod Engine Compartment 3 8L Engines 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When th
129. afety LOCkS x 4 5 eee e emn 31 Child Seat as s ii e 4 eee Ge bese ER a 76 Clean Air Gasoline llle 318 Cleaning Wheels iuh mae RR EEG Y n 398 Climate Control iso RR EX e 240 al C ug a ete Fah aps eh oho eh eS 199 200 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 240 Compact Spare Tire 0 0 0 0 00 meai 301 COM Pass cus es MRI hk eR ard Ae eee 197 Compass Calibration 00050 197 Compass Variance 0 2c eee 198 Computer Trip Travel 0000 199 Console ssec eder eS eee eee a 166 Console Flook 2 Lu eae mue om eges 166 Console Overhead 0 000000 eee 153 Contract Service ized d Ead Pens n a 440 en INDEX 449 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 386 Cooling System iile RR x bead 383 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 385 Coolant Capacity ssa T derak 0 0 02 411 Coolant Level llle 384 387 Disposal of Used Coolant 386 Drain Flush and Refill 384 Inspection pas siea ata aaa Y Ge P RR 387 Points to Remember usn 387 Pressure Cap 44 sts dere ESO b OE dg 386 RadiatorCap ss eden ae ers 386 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 384 411 412 Cruise Control Speed Control 150 Cruise Tight d ois cete Cure a Ego ded 185 Cup Holder 4 222299 4s 203060058004 165 401 Customer Assistance llle 438 Data Recorder Event 0 00 00 eee ene 65 Dealer Service
130. ailures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained a
131. aint manufacturer s will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system
132. air conditioning filter X en SCHEDULE B 423 Miles 57 000 60 000 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 Kilometers 91 000 96 000 101 000 106 000 110 000 115 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate Tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary X X X X X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Front amp Rear Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary Inspect the serpentine drive belt replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Change the All Wheel Drive AWD power transfer unit fluid See note at the end of this chart Change the All Wheel Drive AWD rear carrier fluid X See note at the end of this chart Replace the air conditioning filter X X PK OK OK OK OX OX M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 424 SCHEDULE B NENNEN M A N Miles 75 000 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 120 000 125 000 130 000 134 000 139 000 144 000 I M Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X M Rotate Tires X X X frm Inspect the brake linings X X ME Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary X
133. ake your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h Refer to the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessiv
134. al Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter access door is located under the instrument panel on the passenger side To replace the filter slide the lock toward the rear of the vehicle unlock position Remove the access door and pull the filter downward When installing a new filter ensure its proper orienta tion Align the black arrow on the bottom of the filter frame with the direction of airflow away from the blower motor and towards the center of the car Refer to the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual for the recommended air conditioning filter replacement intervals Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type
135. an design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in en STARTING AND OPERATING 291 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
136. ance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 WARNING CAUTION Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size specified for your vehicle Some combinations of un approved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You Be could lose control and have an accident resulting in Poor suspension alignment may result in LN may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Alignment And Balance serious injury or death Use
137. and the liftgate lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 25 km h Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park or N Neu tral position Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When this feature is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors and liftgate When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors and the liftgate will unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select DRIVER S DOOR 1ST or ALL DOORS Remote Linked To Memory Available with Memory Seat Only When this feature is selected the memory seat mirror and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the remote keyless entry Unlock button is pressed If this feature is not selected then the memory seat mirror and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the door mounted switch Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Sound H
138. any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button If Equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellit
139. ard position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate and activate the panic alarm from distances up to about 23 feet 7 meters using a hand held radio trans mitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis ables all buttons on that transmitter however the but tons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work Shifting the vehicle out of PARK disables all transmitter buttons for all keys ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Two 2 transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle To unlock the doors and liftgate Vehicles built without the powered options will be Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter equipped from the factory with three button transmitters once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all and those built with power options will be equipped doors and liftgate When the UNLOCK button is pressed with six button transmitters the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or driver s door only upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure e On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st under Use Factory Settings in th
140. arrows for the direction you want the mirror to move Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in section 3 of this manual Heated Remote Conirol Mirrors These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window Defrost Illuminated Vanity Mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights turn on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights Sun Visor Extension The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended coverage of the side glass HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se UConnect allows you to transfer calls betw
141. as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 e and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM ESP Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS Anti
142. at forward follow these steps 1 Pull up on the seatback release handle 1 located on the back of the seat to fold the seatback down Release Handle 1 Location 2 Pull the release strap 2 located at the bottom of the seat to lift and tumble the seat forward Release Strap 2 Location To relatch the seat tilt the seat rearward and push down firmly to engage the rear attachments Then lift the seatback release lever labeled 1 and pull the seatback up to return it to its full upright position 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row Third Row Seating If Equipped The third row seats may be used with either or both seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space To fold the seat remove any objects from in front of or on the seat Then pull handle located on the seatback and push it forward Seat Release Handle seatbacks folded or with the second row seats folded and tumbled In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured To raise the 3rd row seat lift up on the seatback and push rearward until the seatback is latched Move the seatback forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched CAUTION Be sure there is nothing in front of the 3rd row seat cushion before folding it down Damage to the seat may occur es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICL
143. atbacks 2 Fold the cargo cover extensions to their stowed posi tion and lock into place 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots located on the trim panel behind the third row seatbacks 4 Grasp the center portion of the cover flap Pull it over the cargo area 5 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the slots on the rear trim panel 6 The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo cover in place Cargo Tie Down Hooks The tie downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving WARNING e Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or colli sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control result ing in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight The cross
144. ation Mode Press the MODE button to select between AM FM CD CD DVD changer or the Satellite Radio if equipped When the Satellite Radio if equipped is selected SA will appear in your radio display A disc may remain in the radio while in the Satellite or radio mode Seek Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either the AM FM or Satellite mode Press the top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding the button in will by pass stations without stopping until you release it Tuning Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency If you press and hold the button the radio will continue to tune until you release the button The frequency will be displayed and continu ously updated while the button is pressed Balance The Balance control adjusts the left to right speaker bal ance Press the AUDIO button select BALANCE then press SEEK or SEEK to adjust the balance Fade The Fade control provides for balance between the front and rear speakers Press the AUDIO button select FADE then press SEEK or SEEK to adjust the fade balance es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Tone Control The Bass and or Treble controls sound for the desired tone Press the AUDIO button select Bass or TREBLE then press SEEK or SEEK to increase or decrease
145. atk Plugs 22224 9 tere RR e sis Engine Air Cleaner Filter Catalytic Converter serere Maintenance Free Battery 376 Air Conditioner Maintenance 378 Power Steering Fluid Check 379 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Front amp Rear Suspension Ball Joints 380 Steering Shaft Seal sss 380 Steering Linkage iens ps saiae r daen 380 Drive Shaft Universal Joints 380 Body Lubrication sste Se seseitsog eums 381 Windshield Wiper Blades 381 Windshield And Rear Window Washers 382 Exhaust System oak das oe epee e 382 Cooling Syste secre e ereat cer ESS ER 383 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 388 BEAK waste oven aoa 389 Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check 390 Fuel System Hoses 0005 391 Automatic Transmission s 392 All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 395 Front And Rear Wheel Bearings 396 Appearance Care And Protection From COMOSION 6244 pd pes i 3 er eG Y C es 396 Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders 401 H Fuses Integrated Power Module 402 a Vehicle Storage s 405 Bl Replacement Light Bulbs 406 B Bulb Replacement xsduesenpstkEE ered s 406 Standard Quad He
146. ator light is an amber light located on the center of the instrument panel above the climate controls Passenger Airbag Disabled Light 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee For almost all sizes of properly seated adults the airbag will be enabled in the event of a collision For small teenagers and some small adults depending on size the airbag may or may not be enabled in the event of a collision Both drivers and passengers should always use the PAD indicator light as an indication if the front passenger is properly positioned or not If the PAD indicator light comes on when an adult is in the passen ger seat have the passenger re position themselves in the seat until the light goes out Remember if the PAD indicator light is illuminated the passenger front airbag will not inflate For almost all properly installed child restraints the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated indicating that the front pas senger airbag is turned off and will not inflate If the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated DO NOT assume the airbag is turned off and move the child restraint to the rear seat A deploying passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an Occupant Classification System children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e The Occupant Classif
147. bars and siderails are designed to carry the over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The vehicle to sway load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars BE Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision WARNING To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Roof Rack 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To move the cross bars press the upper edge of each cross bar button then move the cross bar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame This is can be done with one person standing on each side of the vehicle moving the cross bar at the same time Once the cross bar is in place press the lower edge of the cross bar button to lock it into position Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it
148. ble weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must
149. can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating erake Our vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic O brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Lamp es STARTING AND OPERATING 279 The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natu conditions The system automatically pumps the ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent can it increase braking or steering efficiency be wheel lock up yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following a
150. cator light in the POWER button must be on for the climate control system to operate Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected by the Mode Control To turn off the air conditioning press the A C button a second time The indicator light will turn off E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 NOTE The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for a few seconds If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the A C air filter ATC equipped vehicles only and the front of the A C condenser for an accumulation of dirt or insects The A C condenser is located in front of the radiator The A C air filter is located under the instrument panel on the passenger side Fabric type fascia protectors tend to block the amount of air to the condenser and may reduce air condition ing performance Economy Mode If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Move the temperature control lever to the desired temperature Recirculation Control Press the recirculation button to recirculate the A air inside the vehicle This is located next to the A C button An indicator light on the button shows that air is being recirculated Use the recirculation mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle The recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust NOTE e When the ignition swi
151. ceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission geartrain failure If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100 e 160 km the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the ground Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It All Wheel Drive can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions above 35 mph 55 km h The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles 160 km the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph 72 km h and both front 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME and rear wheels must be on the ground If your vehicle must be towed farther or at a higher rate of speed it must be transported on a flat bed truck All Transmissions CAUTION e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result Always use wheel lift equipment when towing from the front The only other approved method of towing is with a flat bed truck Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal liftgate and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in t
152. chart Flowchart is redialed used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated with entry is dialed Number is Dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e8 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook New Entry Entries Listed one Enter Name Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified at a time Enter Location Enter Number New Entry Added Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 1st Confirmation 2nd Confirmation Enter Location Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared 8131b294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Voice Tree Setup Setup Toggle Pair List Phones New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit override pin code Phones phone Select phone ne to be deleted List Phones priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing Phone Deleted System System Lists confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M North American English SEATS Primary Alternate s 10 Way Dri
153. cket and then reinstall the headlight module ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Front Fog Light 1 Reach under the front fascia and grasp the front fog light bulb 2 Twist the front fog light bulb to remove from the fog light module 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker and Back up Lights 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two tail light assembly screws and rotate the assembly outward to remove the ball stud form the 8Df67165 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Twist the socket assembly to remove it from the License Light housing 1 Place a screwdriver in the slot next to the release tab 4 Pull the bulb out of the socket and push on the release tab to remove the lens 5 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the 2 Pull the bulb out of the socket Replace the bulb and tail light assembly push on the lens until it snaps into place es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel 23 gallons 87 liters Engine Oil With Filter 4 0 Liter Engines SAE 10W 30 API Certified 5 5 qts 5 2 liters 3 8 Liter Engines SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 0 qts 4 7 liters Cooling System 4 0
154. conds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format Program Type Radio Display types Religious Music Religious Music Program Type Radio Display Religious Talk Religious Talk Adult Hits Adult Hit Rock Rock Classical Classical Soft Soft Classic Rock Classic Rock Soft Rock Soft Rock College College Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Country Country Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 Foreign Language Language Weather Weather NEWS ewe By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is Nostal E Nostal displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Oldies Oldies station with the same selected PTY name The PTY Personality Personality function only operates when in the FM and Satellite if Public Public equipped modes Rhythm and Blues R amp B 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The radio display will flash SEEK and the selected PTY program type when searching for the next PTY station If no station is found with the selected PTY program type the radio will return to the last preset station If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset st
155. consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be
156. d in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturers recommended transmis sion fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 4 SPEED DIPSTICK E A Do coLDdo OSG HoT XO rM 80f34e48 Procedure For Checking Fluid Level The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 The vehicle must be on level ground 2 The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Fully apply parking brake 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P PARK Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering t
157. d profes sional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organiza tions In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora tion to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a DaimlerChrysler Corporation product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Data Parameters
158. d the to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis AWD rear carrier fluid must be changed at the more sions warranty frequent intervals shown in schedule B if the vehicle is F er operated under any of the conditions noted by a dia i This maintenance is not required if previously replaced mond at the beginning of the schedule Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 H 430 SCHEDULE A BEEN M SCHEDULE A Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 36 000 I M Kilometers 10 000 19 000 29 000 38 000 48 000 58 000 Ad Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 M Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X ME Rotate Tires X X X X X X im Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if X X X X X Qa necessary ME Replace the engine air cleaner filter X t Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Front X 3 amp Rear Replace the air conditioning filter X X X nn SCHEDULE A 431 Miles 42 000 48 000 54 000 60 000 66 000 72 000 Kilometers 67 000 77 000 86 000 96 000 106 000 115 000 Months 42 48 54 60 66 72 Change engine oil and engine oil
159. ded to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again mo mentarily depress the ESP Control Switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP Control Switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP BAS Warning Lamp and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warn ing Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the probl
160. difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment whe
161. do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered NOTE Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers 9 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353 lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 130 N m 95 ft Ibs If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station 11 Lower the jack to its fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 12 Secure the flat or spare tire as follows e If your vehicle is equipped with cast aluminum wheels the center cap of the wheel must be re moved prior to flat tire stowage Store the center cap inside the glove box or other storage compartment e Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening e For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle e Using the jack handle rotate the drive nut to the right until
162. driver and passengers seated next to a window and a driver inflat able knee blocker If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature refer to the Child Restraint section in this manual can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Passenger Airbag Disabled Light NOTE The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of
163. e Damage to the power steering pump may occur DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger ous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD 5 oe GS Pn SIZE A MAXIMUM
164. e Tar Remover to remove near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use Mopar Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cl
165. e feet on the dash board the OCS may not be able to properly approxi mate occupant size Furthermore the occupant size may appear to increase or decrease due to objects hanging on the seat other passengers pushing on the seat or objects lodged underneath the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 If there is a rapid change in temperature or humidity the OCS may not be able to properly approximate occupant size If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If there is a fault present in the system the AIRBAG warning light will illuminate indicating that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer In the presence of an occupant in the passenger seat if both the PAD indicator light and AIRBAG warning light are illumi nated the airbag will be disabled The ORC will not allow front airbag deployment in the event of a collision for occupants classified into the empty or child size categories The PAD indicator light will illuminate indicating that the Passenger Airbag is OFF when the OCS has determined that the occupant size category is a child Also when the seat is empty or an object that weighs less than a predetermined threshold is placed on the seat the light will remain OFF The PAD indic
166. e CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File Pressing the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 RW FF CD Mode For MP3 Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection Press the RW side of the button to move back through the MP3 selection AM FM Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly DIR Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press the DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Press DISC up button 1 or DISC down button 5 to move through the folders Press the SET button to select a folder Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instruc
167. e EVIC section of this manual 811b8b06 Keyless Entry Transmitter 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on your key fob 3 Continue to hold the UNLOCK button wait at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the LOCK button Release both buttons at the same time 4 This will allow you to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button 5 To reactivate the feature repeat this procedure 6 If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see your authorized dealer for programming assistance To lock the doors and liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the horn will chirp once Sound Horn On Lock Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off by using the following procedure e On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Sound Horn On Lock under Use Factory Settings in the EVIC section of this manual ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
168. e On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the LOCK button on your key fob 3 Continue to hold the LOCK button wait at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate the feature repeat this procedure 5 If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see your authorized dealer for programming assistance Using The Panic Alarm To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once When the Panic mode is activated the interior lights will illuminate the headlamps and parking lights will flash and the horn will sound To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter a second time Panic mode will automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is started and exceeds 15 mph During the Panic Mode the door locks and remote keyless entry systems will func tion normally Panic mode will not disarm the security system on vehicles so equipped NOTE When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY Customer Key Progra
169. e causing serious personal injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running could enter the catalytic converter and once the smoothly engine has started ignite and damage the converter If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the normal starting procedure should be repeated and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump After Starting starting procedures and follow them carefully The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a CAUTION
170. e display These radios will also display the following e After 3 seconds the current channel name and channel number will be displayed for 5 seconds e The current program type and channel number will then be displayed for 5 seconds e The current channel number will then be displayed until an action occurs A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre set stations you may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase
171. e immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in drivability during warm up NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F you may experience hard starting and rough idle follow ing start up even if the above recommendations are followed Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles Whether operating the vehicle on an E 85 ethanol fuel or unleaded gasoline the engine oil requirements are the same Refer to the Maintenance Procedures section of this manual for the proper quality and viscosity engine oil Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F In the range of O F to 32 F you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in drivability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel con sumption You can expect your MPG and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible
172. e languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towi
173. e new variance zone and resume normal operation Mini Trip Functions If Equipped This displays information on the following e Average Fuel Economy ECO AVG Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset The minimum average fuel economy that will be displayed on reset is 0 3 mpg e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined using the MPG for the last few minutes e Off Mode Shows a blank display e Step Button Push this button to cycle through all the Mini trip functions To Reset The Display Pressing and releasing the Reset button once will clear the resettable function currently being displayed The resettable function is average fuel economy Reset will only occur if the resettable function is currently being displayed SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button until the setting is correct 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the time in hours and minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position and the time button is pressed When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed time keeping is accurately maintained Clock Setting Proced
174. e or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules the system should be drained flushed and refilled If the solutio
175. e override is pressed the shifter can be moved out of the park position without pressing the brake After operation return the shifter bezel ring to its original position Brake Interlock Override R Reverse Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Se N Neutral Engine may be started in this range D Overdrive To be used for most city and highway driving it provides smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel economy When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using the D Overdrive position such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions i e in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode and select the 3 range NOTE Using the 3 range in the AutoStick mode while operating the vehicle under heavy operating con ditions will improve performance and extend transmis sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more control AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many othe
176. e reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o clock positions The right hand rocker switch has a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM to Tape or CD mode depending on which radio is in the vehicle 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The left hand rocker switch has a push button in the center The function of the left hand switch is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand rocker switch operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand switch
177. e retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacturer NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor Installing A Child Restraint We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restr
178. e to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON
179. e wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced STARTING AND OPERATING 303 TREAD WEAR INDICATOR i Al ES These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident result ing in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a bal
180. eaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Interior Care Cleaning Interior Fabric Upholstery Your interior seat Yes Essentials fabric upholstery should be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough stains in fabrics apply Mopar Total Clean to a clean cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi Purpose cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total C
181. ectronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Wherever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections
182. ed using the switch located in the center console between the second row seats By pressing the REAR button a third time the rear fan will shut off When the ATC display reads REAR AUTO or when the rear fan is off the switch located in the center console between the second row seats is not functional When the ATC display reads REAR only the rear seat occupants can control the rear fan speed from the rear switch When in the REAR mode the rear occupants can set the rear switch to any fan speed including OFF or AUTO While in the AUTO position the rear fan speed will be automatically controlled Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to section 7 Maintenance Procedures of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation To insure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to section 7 Maintenance Procedures of this manual for proper coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging
183. eee 304 en STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Replacement Tires tses teana maenna aiara 304 Alignment And Balance 305 Eire Chans JM Ls 306 a Siow Tires urged Ru d SOR n eee ax eae 307 a Tire Rotation ico bh ar re 307 Wi Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped 308 Tire Pressure Monitoring Base System Without Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It Equipped i ecer Re RR EIE 309 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings ydes tne du eer one S x eta 310 Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System With Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It Equipped ick seats ak oe e ae 310 Service Tire System Soon 00 312 Using Your Compact Spare Basic Tire Pressure Monitoring System Only 313 Tire Pressure Monitoring Premium System Ilf Equipped nem RR 314 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings osos eyes RECO ER ss Service Tire System Soon General Information sees B Fuel Requirements esee mem Reformulated Gasoline Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 319 MMT In Gasoline 00 0 000005 319 Materials Added To Fuel 0 320 Fuel System Cautions 320 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 321 MB
184. eee 318 Life of Tires aes sects oe ge ah eae a ae agate 304 Liftgate siu cosas dl e ennie cs end ele BED 35 MIENIS oett apace dar ehh Sak derat a edd 81 133 Airbag csc e tow eae eso a dde 55 65 80 188 Anti Lock 2 0 ee 181 Automatic Headlights 136 Back Up 2 i ark e cS P ae vor Ae a ae ed 409 Brake Warning i224 exe RR 182 Bulb Replacement 004 406 Co rtesy Reading Rd RES 133 Cruise iussu eae ed Pea Bey ee a 185 Daytime Running secs acea paa ae 0 000000 136 Dimmer Switch Headlight 134 DoorAjat zug Rec extr E RW e dd 189 Engine Temperature Warning 188 OS racc ERU argentea ace e RR 137 186 409 Hazard Warning Flasher 0 344 Headlight Switch 00000 135 Headlights ice eee eee 135 406 407 High Beam Indicator lille 185 Illuminated ENY 4452s kei Rep RR 20 Instrument Cluster isis eee aere hs 135 Interior ioneedgeRpd Ate eh aae ee dos 135 License esac ay er kawt andaa Rea OR RP RR 410 Liftgate Ajat ice rice le dela uo RE ei 189 Lights On Reminder 000 136 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 185 ne INDEX 455 Oil Pressure ies qr ald hb Boats aa PR RE 186 Park amp weizee44 Ry eiae d RES 408 Reading o iva secet eto kee eee CER e ung 153 Rear Servicing i E eer DERE 409 Rear Tail oi ieee e R ee eed 409 Seat Belt Reminder sess 186 Service sua sisse eed e XX ERE EE GC EU 406
185. een the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system 8105b20d UConnect Switches en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profi
186. efer to Tire computer functions and navigation system Press the Pressure Monitor System in the Starting And Oper STEP button while in this display selects English ating Tire Section Francais or Espanol As you continue the displayed e CHECK TPM SYSTEM Refer to Tire Pressure Monitor information will be shown in the selected language System in the Starting And Operating Tire Section Park Assist System ON OFF f f When this feature is selected the system scans for objects e TCS E e n Control System with a behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear graphic and single chime bumper Objects can be detected from up to 59 inches 150 e TCS ACTIVE Traction Control System with a graphic cm Pressing the STEP button while in this display will disable enable the Rear Park Assist System The EVIC will e SERVICE TCS SYSTEM Traction Control System with display the following message PARK ASSIST DISABLED a graphic and single chime after the feature has been disabled and SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM if there is a problem with the system 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Display U S or Metric Pressing the US M button will change the EVIC odom eter navigation system and A C Control units from US to Metric Use factory Settings When in this display you may select to use the factory settings and no programmable features will be offered Auto Door Locks When this feature is selected all doors
187. egin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice recognition button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately with in 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setu
188. ehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running
189. ehicles Cruising Range 542 elk e eta RE aS 326 Engine OI uuum to dees ec E Beat ate 325 Fuel Requirements 000 324 Maintenance llle 326 Replacement Parts DEATH uisa qure e ded acer iR ee ra Rf ee 325 Flooded Engine Starting 268 Floor Console eee 166 Fluid Capacities oer RR ESPERA 411 Fluid Leaks i232 oe a Rw ae a Re Ra bi 81 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 393 Drakes ame wists xa Sa PH aa TROP 390 413 Power Steering llle 379 413 Fluids s sind dv acy Hew ws be Rea ERN ed dace 412 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 412 Fog Light Service socer ble ba ee 409 Fog Lights 2 mb yr ean es 137 186 409 Folding Rear Seat custees xe ete e ees 124 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle liess 356 Ima seca aries eee es ee ae ee aes 318 Adding eese reed Sacha Rn as 321 Additives cus duit doe dae RO end ds 320 Clean Air 452 INDEX ME Filler Cap Gas Cap sse reser ees 321 Gasoline ose Se tera niex 318 Gauges c qe ease og eai esi aon Race 181 FISES s pnus eb b esu hot dier s 391 Octane Rating ass ese a e 318 412 Requirements agace u saad aane init e eee 318 411 Tank Capacity Sebsseseniasy titititi aii 411 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel System Caution 0000000000 320 F elifig 1 3 odes es eger 9 Re ub obs aaa tend 321 USCS i cud cien e s wa dia PE Xa e 4
190. electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 5 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 6 Anti Lock Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake Sys 8s tem The light will turn on when the ignition If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 7 Brake System Warning Light BRAKE This light monitors various brake functions D including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied there is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the anit lock brake system The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failur
191. em diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 TRACTION CONTROL This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS sy
192. emperature Grades 438 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and hi
193. emperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 446 INDEX a Adding Fuel cte ong urne End ctrca 321 Adding Washer Fluid s 140 382 Additives Fuel 0 0 0 cece eee eee 320 Adjustable Pedals 0 000000 000 148 Air Conditioner Maintenance 378 Air Conditioning llle 241 246 Air Conditioning Controls 241 Air Conditioning Filter 259 379 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 378 Air Conditioning System 241 246 249 378 Air Conditioning System Zone Control 242 Air Pressure Tires 2 0 0 0 0 cee eee 298 Airbag iced er 82 he SLES AMEN E Cd 50 Airbag Deployment llle 63 Airbag Light 2 se m 55 56 65 80 188 Airbag Maintenance asses knti ESEE 64 Airbag Window Side Curtain 51 Alarm Security Alarm llle 18 Alignment and Balance 004 305 All Wheel Drive AWD 276 395 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio less 237 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 384 385 411 Disposal eici beep eee m eee 386 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 279 Anti Lock Warning Lig
194. ends a signal to the OCM The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com a ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al Unapproved modifications or service procedures to ways use the correct seat cover specified for the the front passenger seat assembly its related compo vehicle nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This P RM cover could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those dent A modified vehicle may not comply with approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS e At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except The following requirements must be strictly ad
195. ents Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac turer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s perfor
196. eo dem es Four Speed Automatic Transmission B AutoStick 2 0 ee AutoStick Operation 0 0 AutoStick General Information lll All Wheel Drive If Equipped 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Paine Brake cesa es aga Pees weak aal 276 Mi Tire Safety Information serre Re 288 l Brake System o cess eed coy oes oy keane 278 Tire Markings ses oko Ea cee e ses 288 Anti Lock Brake System suns 279 Tire Identification Number TIN 292 li Electronic Stability Program ESP 281 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 293 ESP Has The Following Operating Modes 283 W Tires General Information 297 ESP BAS Warning Lamp And Tire Pressure vk er Be a CS ee RES 297 a bates wie eA buts oe Tire Inflation Pressures 0 00000 298 DIGG AAMINGYDUSHU DIND cave ge in 2m Radial Ply Tires 0 00 0 esses 300 IB Duchon Controles to exaratae ea e ien 285 Comput Spare Tie cM Dyppel ac esa 301 aM uer Steering cb geese eed cer ep EXE 286 famed Use Spar a T en cea oc 302 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 287 ee Gon icc dubesseadacteaaanies 302 Acceleration 6 0065 ae eee ES ee ae RAYS 287 Tread Wear Indicators oo oon acc hice Raul 303 Traco egs panera des d on d ees OR RR 288 Life Of Tire c LLL eee cece
197. er s authority to operate the equipment CD Player Operation NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the volume control ON before the CD player will operate e This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting The Compact Disc CAUTION This CD player will accept only 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the display will show the time of day If you insert a disc with the ignition OFF the display will show the time of day for about 5 seconds then go out If the power is ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Seek Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection EJT Eject Press the EJT button and the disc will unload a
198. er size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain the chain before further use Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km manufacturer NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire Do not exceed 45 mph 70 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle If chains are used on an All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle they should be used on all four tires Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacture es STARTING AND OPERATING 307 NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement
199. ere is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening In jury may result ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 volt power outlets located on the instru ment panel below the radio The driver s side outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the passenger side outlet is connected directly to the battery The driver s side outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit if equipped with an optional Smoker s Pac
200. ering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has left and right window bags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC AIRBAG Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags If Equipped Front Impact Sensors Side Impact Sensors If Equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring e Seat Belt Reminder Light e Knee Impact Bolster e Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker 2 e Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification System OCS If Equipped Occupant Classification Module Passenger Airbag Disabled PAD Indicator Light Interconnecting Wiring Bladder Assembly Belt Tension Sensor e Front Seat Belt Buckle Pretensioners 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se How The Airbag System Works The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate Based on the level of collision severity the front control module determines the proper rate of inflation The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation The ORC may modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classi
201. es may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 NOTE www chrysler com uconnect www dodge com uconnect www jeep com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing and follow the audible prompts When prompted after the voice on beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Bach cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the
202. ese systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will
203. f your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual INTRODUCTION 5 ee sj DW Xi ESP om ep 7 ej BAS S m ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUT
204. fication Module The ORC will not detect side roll over or rear impacts The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column instrument panel and passenger knee bol sters If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate e Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warn ing light and PAD indicator light in the center of the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off The PAD indicator light will function normally Refer to Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momen tarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up e Y E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
205. fog lights Turn Signals Move the Multi Function Lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is defective 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Pull the Multi Function Lever towards you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the Lever a second time to switch the headlights to LOW beam Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi Function Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS X The wipers and washers are operated by a switch on the control lever The lever is located on the right side of the steering column Rotate the end of the control lever to select the desired wiper speed 80eb7f6a Windshield Wiper Washer Control Windshield Washers To use the front washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is
206. for the child s size Infants and Child Restraints There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil dren LATCH later in this section The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause seve
207. fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on due to fuel vapors escaping from the system Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the malfunction indi cator light to turn on ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 NOTE Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message e Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is TE ie Vence anos Syste deter mee Mat Hle fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or dam propery Senne aged GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument e If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction cluster odometer Tighten the fuel filler cap properly Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is and press the odometer reset button to turn the tightened every time the vehicle is refueled GASCAP message off e If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See Section 7 of this 5 manual for more information Make sure that the fuel filler cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling 324 STARTING AND OPERATING Se FLEXIBL
208. fully open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the button located on the overhead console 81003315 Power Liftgate Button 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se When the remote button is pressed the Lamp Flash NOTE feature is enabled the tail lights will flash to signal that e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is the liftgate is opening or closing A beeping signal will closing or opening the liftgate will automatically sound two seconds before the liftgate starts to open or reverse to the closed or open position provided it close meets sufficient resistance e There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the WARNING liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is e The power liftgate must be in the full open position for clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched any of the close buttons to operate If the liftgate is not before driving away fully open press the open button to fully open the liftgate and then press close e If the liftgate release switch is activated while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
209. g the oil level while M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 ule B the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark interval that occurs first e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter d A amage e Inspect the exhaust system e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Inspect the brake hoses e Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo e Check the fluid levels of coolant bottle brake master nents cylinder and transmission add as needed e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct SNCS MNS GIONIS HE Eerie este tend level operation e Check the coolant level hoses and clamps M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 nn SCHEDULE B 419 SCHEDULE B Follow schedule B if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 96 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an e Day or night
210. gear when coming to a stop Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions While in the AutoStick mode Speed Control will only function in third or fourth gear Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed control If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e If the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected ALL WHEEL DRIVE IF EQUIPPED This feature provides full time on demand All Wheel Drive AWD The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required Under nor mal driving conditions the front wheels provide most of the traction If the front wheels begin to lose traction power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels The greater the front wheel traction loss the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power transfer unit PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch on the brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of bra
211. gh quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 439 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center PO Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 440 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing
212. h time while unbuckling and re buckling the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and stow it 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use
213. has properly locked into position NOTE To reduce the amount of wind noise when the cross bars are not in use move both cross bars next to each other towards the rear of the vehicle in the rear most position The tie down holes on the cross bar ends should always be used to tie down the load Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 CAUTION WARNING e Crossbars should remain equally spaced or parallel at Cargo must be securely tied before driving your any luggage rack position for proper function Non vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the compliance could result in damage to the luggage rack vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in cargo and or vehicle personal injury or property damage Follow the Roof To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs rack 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to load
214. he ON position not the ACCESSORY position Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing with out the ignition key is with a flat bed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the limitations described in this section ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359 TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow an All Wheel Drive AWD or front wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS MAUL Engines 2 yest odes xxv EROR yard 4 364 E SSL Engines EP 365 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 366 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 366 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs 12a reta ec aes e k nus 367 Bl Replacement Parts 00000 368 H Dealer Service 1 llle 369 Bl Maintenance Procedures 369 Engine OW ees sucer RR Rn ee 369 Engine Oil Filter l eese 374 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 374 Sp
215. he buttons until Step Four has been completed NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Pro gramming section 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter and the EVIC display will show Channel X Training where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from the slow to the rapid flash or the EVIC display shows Channel X Trained NOTE If the EVIC display shows Did Not Train repeat steps 2 4 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 5 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light or the EVIC display If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released If the EVIC display shows Channel X Transmit where X is Chan nel 1 2 or 3 programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming Step Two Do not repeat Step One NOTE If your hand held transmitter appears to pro gram the universal transceiver but your garage door does not operate using the transmitter and your garage door opener wa
216. he second row bench seat Pull up on the storage bin cover to access the jack and jack tools E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 Remove the scissors jack and jack handle by rotating the Six Passenger Seating small wing nut to the left The jack and jack handle are stowed in the rear storage bin located in the rear cargo floor Pull up on the storage bin cover and liner to access the jack and jack tools Jack Wing Nut Jack Location 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EMm Spare Tire Stowage Five Passenger Seating The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism To remove or stow the spare use the jack handle to rotate the spare tire drive nut The nut is located under the plastic cover at the center rear of the cargo floor area just inside the liftgate opening Six Passenger Seating The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism To remove or stow the spare use the jack handle to rotate the spare tire drive nut The nut is located under the trim cover at the center of the rear storage bin in the rear cargo floor Lowering Spare Tire Spare Tire Removal Fit the jack handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the left until the spare is on the ground with enough slack cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349 CAUTION WARNING The winch mechanism is desig
217. he tether anchorages in the second row fold amp tumble seating positions and in the outboard second row Fold amp Tumble Seat Tether Strap Routing bench seating positions ensure that the strap is routed over the top of the seatback and under the head restraint between the head restraint posts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 When the tether anchorage is used in the center second When the tether anchorage is used in the third row row bench seating position or on the third row seating seating position the strap should be positioned straight position where equipped the strap should be positioned over the top of the seatback straight over the top of the seatback Third Row Tether Strap Routing Bench Seat Tether Strap Routing 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Automatic Locking Retractor ALR The center seating position on vehicles equipped with a second row bench seat is equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor Allow the belt to return into th
218. he transmission 5 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or warm Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has been driven at least 15 miles 24 km The fluid cannot be comfortably held between the finger tips Cold is when the fluid is below 80 F 27 C 6 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Remove dipstick and note reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD If the fluid level indicates low add sufficient fluid to bring to the proper level CAUTION Do not overfill Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is reseated properly Fluid and Filter Changes Automatic transmission fluid should be changed on all transmissions as follows Normal Usage No change necessary Severe Usage fluid and filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule B Severe Usage is defined as e Police taxi limousine commercial type operation or trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation NOTE Refer
219. hered to those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way e Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags when the ORC and impact sensors detect a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the vehicle passengers and then immediately deflate NOTE A collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the sk
220. hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch STARTING AND OPERATING 335 TOW HEIGHT 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 336 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph
221. hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services or immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 WARNING CAUTION e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire the brake fluid all brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure
222. ht lus 181 Anti Theft System 6 0 0 eee 18 Appearance Care 1 ee 396 Auto Down Power Windows sss 33 Auto Up Power Windows sss 34 Automatic Dimming Mirror 88 Automatic Door Locks 000 0005 28 29 Automatic Headlights 136 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 249 Automatic Transaxle 2 0 0 0 000000058 12 270 Adding Fluid ice ia Y tres 413 Interlock System lille 15271 Reset Mode iieri Rees 272 en INDEX 447 Selection Of Lubricant 392 413 Shif ng coco chive di e Re xR Pa ania 272 Special Additives 0000 394 Automatic Transmission llle 392 Adding Fluid 0 0 00 0000 393 Fluid and Filter Changes 394 Fluid Change 0 0 000004 394 Fluid Level Check 2234405 4 84 ees be eee 393 Fluid Type e na 392 AuitosticK esu bes ae ee doe EAS 151 274 Ball Joints 3 eun cede adc Reed 380 Battery cipes xk 3b ated dros xg XE Rep Es 376 Gas Cautlon coecm deae ter der EG ans 377 Jump Starting i494 e ere Aes 354 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Bearings 2c x vade e etere eb 396 Belts Drive eee 374 Body Mechanism Lubrication B Pillar Location llle 293 Brake Parking 24 eir E ERE XR eps 276 Brake System aceae aasin paa eee eee 278 389 Anti Lock ABS e acire aea a ai 00000002 eee 279 Fl
223. ht is accompanied by a continuous chime the engine temperature is critically hot and the vehicle should be turned off immediately The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible 25 Liftgate Ajar If Equipped This light turns on if the liftgate is not com C pletely closed 26 Door Ajar Light If Equipped fa This light turns on if a door is not completely closed 27 Washer Fluid Light If Equipped S This light turns on when the washer fluid level falls below approximately 1 4 filled The light will remain on until fluid is added 28 Electronic Stability Program ESP Warning Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light If Equipped The malfunction indicator for the ESP is com bined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP BAS UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESP BAS Warning Lamp The ESP
224. ication Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into one of three size categories based on the input from the Bladder Assembly and Belt Tension Sensor The size categories include empty child and adult The OCM sends the Occupant Clas sification to the ORC to identify if a front passenger airbag is allowed If a fault is present the AIRBAG warning light is illuminated ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The Passenger Airbag Disabled PAD Indicator Light indicates to the driver and passenger when the airbag is turned OFF in the presence of a properly seated occupant When the PAD indicator light is illuminated the airbag is OFF Also when the Occu pant Classification System OCS detects either an empty seat of a weight less than the predetermined occupant threshold the ORC will not illuminate the PAD indicator light even though the airbag is turned off When the OCS detects an adult the PAD indicator light will be off and the airbag will be enabled The Belt Tension Sensor BTS is located at the outboard passenger lap belt anchor The BTS generates a signal based on outboard lap belt tension This signal is sent to the OCM to ensure that the resultant bladder pressure increase due to applied lap belt tension does not cause a small occupant to be classified as a larger occupant e The Bladder Assembly is located beneath the seat cushion foam The pressure sensor s
225. ich do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 8 Liter Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Compartment illustration in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils There are a number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi synthetic If you chose to use such a product use only those oils that are American Petroleum Institute API Certified and have the recom mended SAE viscosity grade Follow the maintenance schedule that describes your driving type Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters
226. icle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the value stem facing the ground 1 Remove the spare wheel scissors jack and jack handle from stowage 2 Carefully pry off the wheel center cap if equipped using the tip of the jack handle 3 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts 4 There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the body refer to the following illustration WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351 Pieesde 6 Jack Engagement Locations 5 The
227. ide air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle As a reminder a fuel icon with an arrow 3 indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located on is located in the instrument cluster just below the Fuel Gage 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2 1 inches 50 mm inside the opening If using a portable AUIEN fuel container it should have a flexible nozzle long To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top enough to force open the restricting door off the fuel tank after filling CAUTION NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper
228. ighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate en STARTING AND OPERATING 329 A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been exceeded GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING GVWR 2630 KG 5800 LBS Example Only 8105b265 Example Only Front Axle Rear Axle Empty Weight 2538 Ibs 2076 lbs 1151 kg 942 kg Load Including driver pas 223 lbs 890 Ibs sengers and cargo 101 kg 404 kg Total 2762 lbs 2968 lbs 1253 kg 1346 kg GAWR 2826 Ibs 3035 Ibs 1282 kg 1377 kg TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing 330 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowa
229. ights On Lock Unlock 23 Lap Shoulder Belts 00 41 Using The Panic Alarm ces crece resces mew 24 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 47 Programming Additional Transmitters 25 Seat Belt Pretensioners 0 0 47 Battery Replacement 000 25 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System la Door Locks iid kee Rx ue eG aes 27 Belen DIEI TRORMSCRUEIDI debis s Manual Door Locks 27 Pade DE ete Eee a WOMEN GO tton tpetd ee i es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Seat Belt Extender o sas Gog ai perata ERR Ba A Safety DDR ziksckeess Rhee ae da EROR pap Ks 79 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Exhaust GaS s us Parere vd reuera nns Restraint System Airbag 50 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Event Data Recorder EDR 65 The Vehicle 0 0c eee eee eee Child Restraint 22er ges 67 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make ll Engine Break In Recommendations 79 Outside The Vehicle pirre wasp sees aceyad 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 811b8b06 Three Button Key Ignition Ke
230. ignaling you that the transmitter link has been successfully disabled A message will also be dis played in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC indicating the transmitter has been disabled To disable another transmitter from memory positions 1 or 2 repeat steps 1 4 for each transmitter NOTE This function can be selected using the Cus tomer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section Otherwise see your authorized dealer 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Easy Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Exit and Easy Entry adjust ments available e The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 inches 60 mm if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 4 72 inches 120 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 5 inches 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position The seat shall move to the position located 1 1 8 inches 30 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 2 5 inches to 4 72 inches 60 mm to 120 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory driv
231. ilized vehicle temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse and Drive Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 WARNING TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ee ys With Ignition Key Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam Front Wheel Drive age or failure A tire could explode and injure Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster tions The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL the than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck And distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles 160 don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter km the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph 72 what the speed km h and both front and rear wheels must be on the ground Ex
232. ilure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Tire Pressure mns Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and You could lose control of your vehicle satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat terns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar
233. immer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 80ee5d20 Map Reading Lights NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 15 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the Dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the interior light operation Multi Function Lever The Multi Function Lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and fog lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column Multi Function Control Lever 80ec2daf ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights Turn the end of the Multi Function Lever to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight park light and instrument panel light operation To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the Multi Function Lever up or down Dimmer Control O With the parking lights or headlights o on rotating the dimmer control for the interior
234. in eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or frame Deployed airbags front seat belt buckle pretension ers and driver inflatable knee blocker cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags front seat belt buckle pretensioners and driver inflatable knee blocker replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Classification System serviced as well D Enhanced Accident Response o not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or
235. in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on
236. in this display will select Yes or No The seat will return to the memorized seat location if REMOTE LINK TO MEMORY is set to YES when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the door For more information refer to Easy Entry Exit Seat in the Driver Memory Seat section Tilt Mirrors in Reverse Available with Memory Seat Only When this feature is selected the outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into the Reverse position The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of Reverse position Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Compass Display If Equipped This display provides one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually set the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display COMPASS CALIBRATING until the compass is calibrated The compass will calibrate automatically after approximately 40 seconds if no buttons are pressed and the vehicle is in Park You may also calibrate the compass by completing three 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects the COMPASS CALIBRATING EVIC message will turn off and the com
237. ine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine off and cold the coolant level in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolan
238. ing discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension wn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after cation quency kHz Bit rate kbps writing are most likely multisession discs The use of 320 256 224 multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 longer disc loading times Layer 3 48 44 1 32 112 96 80 64 Supported MP3 file formats 56 48 40 32 The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten 160 128 144 I sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 MPEG 2 Audio 5 2205 16 112 96 80 64 Fu Layer 3 56 48 40 32 24 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the
239. ing position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position The Easy Entry and Easy Exit feature will be automati cally disabled if the seat is already positioned closer than 2 5 inches 60 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Exit Seat feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Exit Seat feature can be enabled or disabled through the customer programmable features in the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC refer to Easy Exit Seat under Use Factory Settings ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Tilt Mirrors in Reverse Available with Memory Seat Only If Equipped This additional feature provides automatic outside mir ror positioning which will aid the driver s view of the ground rearward of the front doors The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into the Reverse position The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of Reverse position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir rors in Reverse position NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en abled when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mi
240. ink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 154 Hood Release leeren 131 loh Ap ea Ae ae ee awe Si ae 388 391 TEON aci nuce debes ka e dor ee Palas hor a 12 Key lee Ree re piitan e Se daed UPS 12 Ignition Key Removal lesse 12 Illuminated Entry 22 rm roe 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key sssssns 15 Indicator Traction Control 0 183 Infant Restraint ereere 0 0 0 cee eee 68 69 Information Center Vehicle 05 191 Instrument Cluster 178 179 180 Instrument Panel and Controls 177 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 400 Integrated Power Module Fuses 402 Interior Appearance Care 004 399 Interior Lights 00000004 134 135 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 139 Introd cti ft 2 22xeca4er e ed bb x eb 4 Jack Location saxa cede x ace Re Y ces 346 Jack Operation ser e EI Ree RE S 346 350 Jacking Instructions llle 350 Jump Starting sra Rey setes 354 Key Programming iae cine rh enc ani Key Replacement i a d echec hee ed Key Sentry Immobilizer 454 INDEX aa Key In Reminder ssa sees e 14 Keyless Entry System llle 20 KEYS ssa xke e OO as E WR ad e ERR 12 Knee Bolster cerai ade PE X a 55 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 41 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren case va iate eee as 71 74 Latches lum 131 Lead Free Gasoline 2 2 0c
241. ions MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing gt en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417 e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in vice tervals exceed 6000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months e Off road or desert operation WIMODEVOR Comms HES NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months CAUTION whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule B At Each Stop for Fuel Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not n 4 e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched warmed engine is shut off Checkin
242. iscs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting The Compact Disc CAUTION This CD player will accept only 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the display will show the time of day If you insert a disc with the ignition OFF the display will show the time of day for about 5 seconds then go out If the power is ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Seek Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection EJT Eject Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the radio mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear The disc can be ejected with the radio
243. ittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 CUPHOLDERS Second Row Seat Cupholders On vehicles equipped with five passenger seating the second row seat cupholders are located in middle of the seatback armrest Pull down on the armrest to access the cupholders Push the armrest up when the cupholders are no longer needed Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console Push down on the forward edge of the console to release the cupholders Press the cover up when the cupholders are no longer needed i Five P i hol Six Passenger Seating Cupholders t a CHPNUUISON 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M On vehicles equipped with six passenger seating the second row seat cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console located between the second row seats Push down on the forward edge of the console to release the cupholders Press the cover up when the cupholders are no longer needed Third Row Seat
244. ive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not t
245. kage Front Power Outlets 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M A third outlet is located on the back of the front center console near the floor and is also controlled by the ignition switch A fourth outlet is located on the driver s side in the rear cargo area and is also controlled by the ignition switch The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating the power source The passen ger side instrument panel and center console outlets are powered directly from the battery items plugged into these outlets may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting The passenger side and center console outlets are protected by an automatic reset circuit breaker The automatic circuit breaker restores power when the overload is removed NOTE If desired the fourth power outlet in the rear cargo area can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the OFF position Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these interm
246. ke application ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the Park position To release the parking brake pull out on the parking brake release located on the left side of the instrument panel Parking Brake Release When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 278 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in Park a manual transmission in Reverse or first gear Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so
247. ken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e fully closed windows and e dry weather condition e Operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume Bluetooth Communication Link Occasionally Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this hap pens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recom mended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a reset you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Voice Command Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency English Phonebook edia A ice mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last See Enter Number The 32 name language Phonebook See Setup Number on Phone specific phonebook will be Flow
248. kers to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Left and right window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi fication System refer to Occupant Classification Sys tem in this section has determined the seat is empty or is occupied by a child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 If your vehicle is equipped the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions But even in collisions where the airbags inflate you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt refer to section on Child Restraint should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat approp
249. kes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates This especially applies to children The win dow bag is only about 31 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker it signals the inflator unit A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflat able Knee Blocker The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker inflates rearward towards the driver s knees to help protect the knees and position you for the best inter action with the front airbag The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink your eyes It then quickly deflates while helping to protect the driver s knees 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag If your vehicle contains a Passenger Airbag Disable indicator light it will be equipped with the Occupant Classification System OCS The OCS system will classify an occupant into a size category based on sensor readings from within the seat cushion Occu pants should try to remain in a normally seated position If the occupant s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle i
250. l Electronic Automatic 48 15 Amp Blue PLG OHC Body Control low Transaxle EATX Solenoid Module BCM Naviga 37 25 Amp ASD tion Hands Free Phone Natural HFM 38 20 Amp Yel Fuel Pump d ee papier 39 20 Amp Yel A C Clutch MTV 50 15 Amp Blue HVAC DVD RAD CLK SKREEM ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 VEHICLE STORAGE CAUTION If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 e When installing the Integrated Power Module days you may want to take steps to protect your battery cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop You may erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in a electrical system e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of failure service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse contin ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHIC
251. l come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal night time driving Lights on Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlighted area es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 To activate the delay feature turn off the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The 90 second delay inter val begins when headlight switch is turned off If the headlights or park lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned on the delay will be cancelled If the headlights are turned off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition off to activate this feature Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the Multi Function Lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the Multi Function Lever NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the
252. le you may not be able to use any UCon nect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operations Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the voice on beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry o
253. le park that vehicle within booster cable reach and without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for both vehicles 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immob
254. lean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue
255. lights on the Multi Function Lever upward will increase the bright ness of the instrument panel lights 8093e5e9 Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dim mer control is in this position 8093e5f6 Interior light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the ex treme bottom OFF position The in terior lights will remain off when the doors are open OFF 8093e60e 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Oo Rotate the dimmer control upward to a the first detent This feature brightens the odometer and radio display when the parking lights or headlights are on during daylight conditions OFF 8093e650 Automatic Headlights This system automatically turns your headlights ON or OFF based on ambient light levels To turn the system ON turn the end of the Multi Function Lever to the third detent position When the system is ON the Headlight Time Delay feature is also ON This means your head lights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System OFF turn the end of the Multi Function Lever to the OFF position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come ON in the Automatic mode Daytime Running Lights Canada Only The high beam headlights wil
256. ll cancel this feature Express Open Feature The sunroof is equipped with an intermediate stop or comfort stop position This feature is designed to elimi nate wind buffeting at vehicle speeds between 20 40 mph 32 64 km h To operate this feature momentarily press the OPEN button rearward to activate the Express Open Feature and the glass will automatically stop at the comfort stop position Pressing the button rearward again will fully open the sunroof During the Express Open operation any movement of the button will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position Again momentarily pressing the button rearward will activate the Express Open Feature 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To close the sunroof press and hold the CLOSE button WARNING forward Again any release of the button will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open e NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle Occu condition until the button is pushed forward again pants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating The sunshade can be opened manually It will also open the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may as the sunroof opens The sunshade cannot be closed if result in serious injury or death Don t leave the the sunroof is open keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle In an accident th
257. lower speeds The fan speed increases as you move the control clockwise 81477abe 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Dual Zone Temperature Control If Equipped With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System each front seat occupant can independently control the tem perature of air coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle 8096321c DUAL ZONE TEMP CONTROL This is accomplished by having a separate temperature control lever for both the driver and front seat passenger The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution 809630dd NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots Panel Mode Panel Outlets UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vane knob on the center outlets down will close off the air flow from the center outlets The thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off the air flow from these outlets 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Bi Level Mode Bi Level Outlets Air comes fro
258. lowing beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone Note this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect sys tem 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of th
259. lt Steering Column 000000 141 Tire and Loading Information Placard 293 Tire Identification Number TIN 292 Tire Markings 2c Rex erdum a 288 Tire Safety Information cessc essa iesite kiras 288 THOS ics ede woe e E a a EE aoa ae 81 297 443 Aging Life of Tires 0 0000 304 Aif Pressure 120254 vu Rede aes wa RE wae aha 297 Alignment 43 xu diee ed RIRs E en 305 Chains sa tket queeliore x dba dg Sor eoa tod dte 306 Changing te scce dre bide diene a eds s 346 Compact Spates sorer icas reas ea aik a Ra 301 General Information lille 297 High Speed swiss whi kee aun e En Ra e 299 Inflation Pressures onnan naana aa 298 Jacking nis ails a aed m pa dade ee wes 346 Life OF Tires 6 isc 2 44 ev ad eR 304 Load Capacity i er un 293 294 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 308 Quality Grading 00 0004 443 Radial so earr enoed obo ok ha ed eee es GG 300 Replacement sc presies RR a pU ead 304 RotatiOn uu erate aut S eho ae oe ee 307 Safely ud etg eene ede reete Pus e 288 297 JR x 290 Snow Tires 2 652 3 r4daGG RI PERS 44 307 Spare lie sigaar ae ai s eR Ros eni E CRAT aos 348 SPINNING ossa kaasa ee d e eb dnce te 302 Tread Wear Indicators 0000005 303 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 335 TOWING tere ae a e E See dg ala emer alate ee 329 Disabled Vehicle llle 357 Gude duke an oS bae SD Ade oS SSDS om ee
260. lue s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minuets above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this infor mation Service Tire System Soon The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 60 seconds in the instrument cluster and an audible chime when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every 10 minutes without an audible chime until the fault condition not longer exists In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON text message for 3 seconds This text message is then followed by for the pressure value indicating which of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists Iff the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Telltale Lamp will no longer flash the SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON text message will no longer display and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes 316 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore it will not be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System In the event that a compact
261. m Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the fol
262. m both the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost A slight amount of air is also directed through the side window demister outlets NOTE In many temperature lever positions the bi level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Floor Outlets Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Mix Mode Mix Outlets Air comes from the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keep ing the windshield clear 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Defrost Mode Defrost Outlets Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this setting when necessary to defrost your windshield and side windows NOTE For improved safety the compressor is activated and the recirculation mode is deactivated when Mix or Defrost modes are selected This is done to assist in drying the air and it will help in keeping the windows from fogging Manual Air Conditioning Operation To turn on the air conditioning set the front blower control to any speed and press the A C button which is located next to the recirculation button An indicator light on the A C button shows that the air conditioning is on NOTE The indi
263. mance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you E STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outs
264. mming NOTE If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your authorized dealer for assistance Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 bat tery NOTE Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 With the transmitter buttons facing down use a small screwdriver or similar flat object to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during removal g Separating Transmitter Halves 81182c72 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the transmitter case snap the two halves together Make sure there is an even gap be tween the two halves Test transmitter operation General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails t
265. n select and press any numbered button without an illumi nated light above it 2 Gently insert the disc with the label facing up while the light below the loading slot is illuminated On vehicles equipped with the premium version the light above the chosen button will also be flashing indicating es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 which numbered position the disc will be loaded into The disc will automatically be pulled into the CD DVD changer 3 Upon insertion the disc will begin to play and the light below the loading slot will turn off On vehicles equipped with the premium version the light above the chosen button will remain illuminated 4 Repeat the process for loading any additional CD DVDs into the premium version multi disc changer The CD DVD changer will stop while additional CD DVDs are loaded If the radio volume control is ON the unit will switch from radio to CD DVD mode and the video screen will turn on If the DVD supports the autoplay feature play will begin automatically in approximately 10 seconds after the DVD disc menu is displayed If the DVD does not play automatically press the ENTER button on the remote control or on the side of the video screen to select play from the menu options The radio display will show the chapter number and index time in hours and minutes of the DVD or the track number minutes and second of the CD NOTE e You may eject a disc with the radio OFF e If y
266. n switch is in the ACCESSORY or ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of PARK Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACCESSORY or ON position NOTE Ifa malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Four Speed Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Reset Mode Electronic Transmission The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into sec ond gear The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected Park P Reverse R and Neutral N will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event that the problem has been momentar
267. n is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 CAUTION Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en gine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT cool ant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations fo
268. n you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 441 WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www NHTSA gov or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC
269. nd hold FF Fast Forward once and the CD DVD changer will begin to fast forward until the FF button is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner ENTER Button 17 This button only functions in DVD video mode Use the ENTER button to enter selections from the menu screens Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the menu screen options Light Button 18 Pressing this button illuminates the buttons on the re mote control 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Remote Control Battery Service To replace the batteries for the remote control slide the cover rearward The replacement batteries for the remote control are two AAA batteries Operating Instructions Video Screen Push up on the release button to lower the video screen 22 8142fcde Screen handle 1 Screen Width Button Changes the width of the screen picture UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 2 Enter Button This button will enter the selection from the p on screen menu 3 Brightness Button Changes the brightness of the screen picture Screen Button 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Instructions Headphones 812cd573 Rear Headphones 1 Power Button 2 Volume Control 3 Power Indicator Power Button Pressing the power button will turn the headphones ON OFF An indicator light will illuminate on the head phone earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON NOTE
270. nd move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the radio mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF FF TUNE RW Press FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner RND Random Play Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks Press the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward feature If TUNE RW is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CD DVD Changer Operation Press the MODE button to select between the CD player and the optional remote CD DVD changer Time Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported media disc types The MP3
271. ned for use with the Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the jack handle only Use of an air wrench or other vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off power tools is not recommended and can damage the the road to avoid the danger of being hit when winch operating the jack or changing the wheel When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher cable and pull it through the center of the wheel amp Blocebothithefrontand rear of the wheel diagonally oppo mH site the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK Turn OFF the ignition N BLOCKA e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Jacking Instructions WARNING e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised veh
272. ng assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico city and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter
273. ng system includ ing blower speed outlet air temperature and airflow distribution through the various outlets within the in strument panel Using the TEMP buttons adjust the 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME temperature you would like the system to maintain When the system is set to your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by allowing the system to function automatically The system will operate fully automati cally in either AUTO HI or AUTO LO The AUTO LO setting will limit the maximum fan speed and should be used when more quiet operation is desired Use the AUTO HI setting when the quickest cool down or warm up performance is desired NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Customer Programmable Features in Section 3 of this manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain off and DELAY will appear in the display until the engine warms up An estimate of the time remaining until the DELAY is complete will appear periodically in the display However
274. ng wheel The adjust able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position The switch is located on the drivers door trim panel next to the power seat switches Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF e The pedals can be adjusted while driving e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R Reverse or when the Speed Control is ON A message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be ad justed when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Ad justable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with memory seat feature your remote keyless entry transmitter or memory seat buttons on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the adjustable pedals to saved positions CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTR
275. nitoring Telltale Lamp If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability NOTE The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System low tire pressure telltale The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi nate in the instrumen
276. nother vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just can prevent accidents press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds es If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound
277. ntain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The overhead console can contain courtesy reading lights an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses optional power sunroof switches and an optional power liftgate switch 80ee5d20 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn these lights on Press a second time to turn the lights off The lights also turn on when a front door a rear door or the liftgate is opened The lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the overhead console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses Press the door latch to open the compartment The door will slowly rotate to an open position 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED WA
278. o airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 The most common causes are e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation da es a e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing Insects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants CAUTION Washing Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve d 5 hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces um Special Care e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you driv
279. o determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity
280. o operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 DOOR LOCKS If the lock knob is up when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Manual Door Locks Lock the doors by pushing up on the lock knob on each door trim panel When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death Door Lock Plunger 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Power Door Locks locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden A power door lock switch is on each front door trim tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition and a door is open as
281. on ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 ESP has the following operating modes e ESP On This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below e Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP Control Switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally with the exception of engine power reduction This mode is inten
282. orn On Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Flash Lights On Lock Unlock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Headlamp Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose when exiting the vehicle to have the headlamps remain on for 30 60 or 90 seconds or not remain on Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select 30 60 90 or OFF Headlamp On With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is selected and the headlight switch has at least once been moved to the AUTO position the headlights will turn on in approximately 10 seconds when the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on in this way Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness
283. ossible and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air condi tioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H 2 Temperature Gauge and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera immediately and call for service ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 3 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position The Low Fuel Light will turn on when the fuel level reaches approximately 2 to 4 gallons 7 to 15 liters this light will remain on until fuel is added UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 4 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle
284. ot start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If necessary repeat the above procedure NOTE Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock features in accordance with local laws ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system NOTE When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the vehicle s ignition key or any similar item into the child lock control and slide it upward Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to engage the Child Protection Door Lock on the opposite rear door NOTE After engaging the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged To Disengage the Child Protection
285. ou insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio mm OFF the DVD will automatically be pulled into the DVD changer and the display will show the time of day e It is recommended to label home made burned discs with a permanent marker instead of adhesive labels These types of labels may become loose and cause the disc to be stuck in the DVD player This may cause permanent damage to the DVD mechanism 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EJECT EJT Button If there is a disc in the changer press the EJT button and the disc will eject If you do not remove the disc within 10 seconds it will be reloaded and the display will show PAUSE The radio mode will continue to operate To eject additional discs from the premium version multi disc changer first select the numbered button where the disc is located and then press the EJT button Operating Instructions Remote Control NOTE Aim the remote control at the radio located on the center of the instrument panel and press the desired button Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of sight may affect the function of the remote control Remote Control 812cd578 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Remote Control Buttons Remote Control Buttons 10 Program Down Previous Disc 11 Program Up Next Disc 12 Slow 13 Stop 14 Menu 15 Menu Down Previous Track Chapter 16 Menu Right Fast Forward 1
286. ou want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature Power Window Switches 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The time is customer programmable through the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Power Accessory Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 of this manual for details Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window NOTE Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the
287. ow bags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG a Side Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you These protec tive covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with left and right window bags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions If your vehicle is equipped with left and right window bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the window bags Front airbags along with seat belts and front seat belt buckle pretensioners work with the instrument panel knee bloc
288. p Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System Voice Recognition VR Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say send Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 UConnect phonebook nametag recognition rate is optimized for the voice of the person who stored the name in the phonebook You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spo
289. parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E 85 fuel follow Sched ule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the charts that follow This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating
290. pass will function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the COMPASS CALI BRATING message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually To put into a Calibration Mode Turn on the ignition switch and set the display to Compass Press the RESET button for at least 10 seconds until the COMPASS CALIBRATING message appears Release the MENU button and complete three 360 turns in an area free from large metal objects The COMPASS CALIBRATING message will turn off and the compass will function normally 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8000cbab es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 To set the variance Turn the ignition switch ON and set the display to Compass Press the MENU button for approximately 5 seconds but no more than 10 seconds The COMPASS VARIANCE message and the last vari ance zone number will be displayed Press the STEP button to select the proper variance zone as shown in the map Press the RESET button to set th
291. plitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SALES CODE RAH AM amp FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER AND CD DVD CHANGER CONTROLS NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower left side of your radio faceplate MP3 STNR PTY RND TP TA LOG AF OY E so f SEEK mH MODE AUDIO DIR RND DISC v 8141b8a1 RAH radio Radio Operation Power Volume Control Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio on Turn the volume control clockwise to increase the volume NOTE Power to operate the radio is supplied through the ignition switch It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio PTY Program Type Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the TUNE button within 5 se
292. r situations AutoStick Operation The AutoStick position is just below the Overdrive posi tion and is identified by the word AUTOSTICK When you place the shift lever in the AutoStick position it can be moved from side to side Moving the lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear display located in the instrument cluster es STARTING AND OPERATING 275 You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal If you choose the Overdrive mode the transmission will oper ate automatically shifting between the four available gears When you wish to engage AutoStick simply move the shift lever to the AUTOSTICK position The transmis sion will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen Move the lever back to the Overdrive position to shift out of the AutoStick mode AutoStick General Information e The transmission will automatically upshift from first to second gear and from second to third gear when engine speed reaches about 6300 RPM Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph 119 km h and from second to first gear above 41 mph 66 km h will be ignored You can start out in first second or third gear Shifting into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed reaches 15 mph 24 km h The transmission will automatically downshift to first
293. r tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System 81477aba Manual Heating and A C Controls Power Button When the POWER button is pressed the indicator will illuminate and the blower will run at the speed selected by the front blower control When the button is pressed a second time the indicator light turns off the blower will turn off and the system will be positioned in the recircu lation mode Blower Control The Blower controls the amount of air delivered to the passenger compartment There are four b
294. r using Hybrid Organic Addi tive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant a minimum solution of 50 rec ommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated eng
295. r you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options are at any prompt say Help follow ing the voice on beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the mirror Cancel Command At any prompt after the voice on beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual One of the following vehicle specific websit
296. rake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake And Power Steering Hoses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Often fluid such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings Therefore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the
297. rammed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed and needs to be cut ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new sentry keys to the system if you have two valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound The Theft Alarm Light will stop flashing
298. re injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH later in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of posi
299. responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Lamp The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States onre nesse darya aa OE KR5S120123 Canada seg soueen era Eee a eae s 2671 S120123 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Se FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 89 800dfab an octane range of 87 to 89 or higher The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If
300. retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seats the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Press the button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 18
301. rgo area To fold and tumble the seat follow these steps 1 Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the seat 2 Lower the head restraint to its full downward position and rotate the arm rest to the upright position 3 Move the seat to the full rear position 4 Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the outboard side of the seat labeled 1 and fold the seatback down Seatback Release Lever To assure the seatback is latched in the folded position additional downward pressure on the seatback may be required when folding 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Pull up on the release handle labeled 2 and lift firmly to tumble the seat fully forward If the seat contacts the rear of the front seat move the front seat forward Seat Release Handle To relatch the seat tilt the seat rearward and push down firmly to engage the rear attachments Then lift the seatback release lever labeled 1 and pull the seatback up to return it to its full upright position WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched Third Row Easy Exit If Equipped For passengers sitting in the third row seats the second row seats can be folded and tumbled forward for easy exit es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 To fold and tumble the se
302. ria d p ds in the 5 S p ld engine compartment near the battery is center con Uis maxi us mini fuses and m A label that 8 Taod Power Seat C B identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Cavity Cartridge Description Cavity Cartridge Description Fuse Fuse 9 40 Amp Power Sunroof 42 40 Amp Front Blower Green Green opare Cavity Mini Fuse Description 11 40 Amp Headlight Washer Power p Green Liftgate 24 ag Yel Power Outlet Selectable i Spare 25 15 Amp Blue Radio Amplifier Naviga 13 40 Amp Radiator Fan 1 j tion Hands Free Phone Green HFM Electronic Vehicle 14 Spare Information Center EVIC 15 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake System EC SNRF Mirror Green ABS Module 26 20 Amp Yel Power Outlet 40 40 Amp Driver Door Node low Green 27 Spare 41 40 Amp Passenger Door Node 28 25 Amp Horn Green Natural 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M low Cavity Mini Fuse Description Cavity Mini Fuse Description 29 20 Amp Yel Cluster CHMSL Stop 44 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats low Lights Anti Lock Brake Natural System ABS 45 10 Amp Red Anti Lock Brake System 30 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch ABS Ignition Run 31 20 Amp Yel Hazard 46 20 Amp Yel Passenger Door low low 34 Spare 47 20 Amp Yel Driver Door 35 Spare low 36 20 Amp Ye
303. riate for the size and age of the child Older children who do not use a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow chil dren to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to the section on Child Restraint 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee You should read the instructions provided with your WARNING child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In 2 All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags Always wear your seat belts even though you room to inflate have airbags 4 If your vehicle has left and right window bags do Being too close to the steering wheel or instru not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully ment panel during front airbag deployment could into the space between you and the door cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the ste
304. rive belt replace if necessary 3 Replace the air conditioning filter This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture f This maintenance is not required if previously replaced to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a sions warranty malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all receipts EN SCHEDULE A 435 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle 0 eee eee eee 438 Prepare For The Appointment 438 Prepare AList see an i 438 Be Reasonable With Requests 438 BL If You Need Assistance 0000 438 Bl Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 441 ll Mopar Parts Bl Reporting Safety Defects 00 441 Ine Canada S5 uova een atte ios S 441 Bl Publication Order Forms 0 0 442 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades JYeadwedf 4 4 65 apes ieee Ae ap ba EXE dex Traction Grades T
305. river should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reacti vated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h Belt Alert Programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON RUN position DaimlerChrysler does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position engine does not need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt eac
306. rk plug Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata lytic converter For proper type of replacement spark plugs refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Informa tion label in the engine compartment Engine Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con ditions the filter element should be inspected periodi cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule B ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 WARNING Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or damage maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In Catalytic Converter the event of engine malfunction particularly involv The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor only
307. rolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions Maintenance Free Battery The top of the MAINTENANCE FREE battery is perma nently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide sta
308. row seat handles are built into the seatbacks of all front seats The p floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods Load Floor Panel NOTE Be sure to reattach the strap to secure the load Grocery Bag Holders floor panel when not in use es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with memory systems your remote keyless entry transmitter or memory seat buttons on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat outside mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and radio station presets to saved positions Driver Memory Switches The memory seat buttons located on the driver s door will always recall stored settings The remote keyless entry transmitter can be programmed to recall positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed Refer to the following procedure on how to link a remote keyless entry transmitter to a position NOTE The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in Park a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall memory positions press memory button number 1 if you are recalling the memory position for driver one or press memory button number 2 if you are recalling the memory position for driver two A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons during a recall When a recall is cancelled the sea
309. rrors in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled through the customer programmable features in the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC refer to Tilt Mirrors in Reverse under Use Factory Settings TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel Hood Release Lever 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Next push to the left the safety catch located under the front edge of the hood near the center 80ee5cdc Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 15 cm 6 inches and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 LIGHTS Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned ON by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn the light OFF The lights also turn on when a door is opened or the d
310. rs Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol High Intensity Discharge Headlights HID If Equipped The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlight switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb 7 yourself If a headlight bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlights when the headlight switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge Headlights HID when the headlights are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Front Park Turn Signal and Sidemarker Lights 1 Remove the two screws securing the headlight mod ule to the vehicle and pull the headlight module forward away from the vehicle disengaging the assembly from the lower attachment clip 8016713e 2 Twist the bulb socket to remove from the headlight module and pull the bulb from socket 3 Replace the bulb reinstall the so
311. rting voltage 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are performance check Drive belt tension should also be flammable and can explode injuring you Other checked at this time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Se
312. s Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid trans mission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS M Miro neu esp UE AE base aged Sone d 88 Heated Remote Control Mirrors 91 Inside Day Night Mirror 88 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors 91 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 88 Mi Hands Free Communication UConnect Driver s Side Outside Minor Auto Dimmer If Equipped ie eee a a A 91 If Equipped teste weal ata teo 89 Operations accidet mace e RR RC RI E d 93 Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature 89 Phone Call Features 99 Outside Mirror Driver s Side 89 UConnect System Features 102 Outside Mirror Passenger s Side
313. s This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E Instrument Panel And Controls 177 W Setting The Analog Clock B Base Instrument Cluster 0 178 W Electronic Digital Clock B Premium Instrument Cluster 179 Clock Setting Procedure 200 Wi Instrument Cluster Descriptions 180 W Radio General Information 200 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Radio Broadcast Signals 200 If Equipped accresce cerris e 191 Two Types Of Signals seen 200 T M dd 7 m 193 Electrical Disturbances 0 201 Compass Display If Equipped 197 AM Reception v paisa en due sce e eae ds 201 FM R ceptiott
314. s aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Latch Plate To Buckle e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your p abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle Removing Slack From Belt The belt will automatically
315. s entry or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Once unlocked on vehicles equipped with power locks the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the key To open the liftgate depress the liftgate release switch located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 8107301d Liftgate Release Handle The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h NOTE e In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift gate trim panel e If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate pressing the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area The liftgate will re lock automatically within 10 seconds once the lift gate is closed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter Press the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is
316. s door lock switch in the LOCK direction 6 Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If necessary repeat the above procedure Auto Unlock On Exit If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened This will occur only after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of Park with all doors closed and then shifted back into the Park position 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se This feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks Lock or Unlock If desired the Auto Unlock On Exit feature can be turned on or off by using the following procedure e On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Auto Unlock On Exit under Use Factory Settings in the EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps Auto Unlock On Exit Programming 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this program ming procedure 3 Insert the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position do n
317. s manufactured after 1995 your garage door opener may have a multiple security code system rolling code system If your garage door is the rolling code type please proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System Programming A Rolling Code System 1 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit m in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 2 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manu facturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step Three 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming Step Two Do not repeat Step One For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Canadian Programming Gate Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmis
318. s might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver look over his her shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist System 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system If Service Park Assist System appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer REAR CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Vehicles with Navigation may be equipped with a Rear Camera that allows you to see an on screen image on the navigation screen of the rear of your vehicle whenever it is put into R Reverse The camera is located in the light bar of the rear license plate Use the following steps to access the Rear Backup Cam era feature 1 Start the engine 2 Place shift lever in R Reverse 3 Wait three seconds and the camera view will display on the Navigation Screen NOTE The camera view will display only while the vehicle is in R Reverse 4 Perform
319. s the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underin flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp Using Your Compact Spare Basic Tire Pressure Monitoring System Only Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure monitor ing sensor Therefore it will not be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System In the event that a compact spare tire is used to replace a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Monitoring Lamp to be ON and a Chime will sound This sequence will repeat for every key cycle until the original Tire Pressure Monitoring System tire has been properly repaired or replaced and put back on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire Tire Pressure Monitoring Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module
320. same direction to turn the heated seat off The indicator light will show when LOW or HIGH heat is ON Rear Heated Seat Switches 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e Ifthe lights in the second row heated seat switch begin to flash when the switch is pressed it indicates that the heated seat is not functioning properly and that ser vice is required See your authorized dealer for service e Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within 2 to 3 minutes e The heated seats will turn off when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Second Row Manual Seat Recliner If Equipped The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of the seat To recline lean forward slightly lift the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched Seatback Release Lever NOTE When using the recliner mechanism with the 3rd row seat folded down the second row seat may need to be adjusted forward to achieve full recline es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or fatally injured Use the recliner only when
321. se locations are on the sill flange on the underside of the body The jack is to be located engaging the flanges 20 cm 8 inches inward from the edge of the wheel opening closest to the wheel to be changed Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged Never jack up the vehicle using any suspension components 6 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the wheel lug nuts for vehicles with wheel covers remove the cover from the wheel by hand Do not pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub 8 Install the spare wheel for vehicles with wheel covers align the notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover on the wheel by hand only and install the wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack
322. set 8 Within 5 seconds press and release the LOCK button on one of the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters A chime will sound signaling you that the transmitter has been successfully linked A message will also be dis played in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC indicating the transmitter has been linked es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Repeat the above steps for the second position using the other driver s door numbered button and Remote Key less Entry Transmitter Each time the SET S button and a numbered button are pressed you erase the old memory and store a new one To Disable A Transmitter Link Follow These Steps 1 Select Remote Linked To Memory from the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center Customer Program mable features 2 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 3 Press and release the SET S button located on the driver s door A light in the button will flash telling you that you are in the set memory mode You have five seconds to complete the next step 4 Within 5 seconds press and release button 1 or 2 on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling you that the driver memory has been set A message will also be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC indicating a position has been set 5 Within 5 seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitters A chime will sound s
323. sion which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the Program ming procedures regardless of where you live replace Programming HomeLink Step Three with the follow ing NOTE If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly and the EVIC display will show Channel X Trained where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 Proceed with Programming Step Four to complete es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 35
324. smitter leeren 154 Unleaded Gasoline llle 318 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 47 Vanity Mirrors eaae nr eee 91 Variance Compass 6 6 198 Vehicle Certification Label 327 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 0048 294 326 328 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage 6 6 ees 258 405 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 5 221 Warning Flasher Hazard lt o ecco ausi setes 344 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 180 Warnings and Cautions Warranty Information ep andrean ee 441 Washer Adding Fluid 140 382 en INDEX 463 Washers Windshield 138 Washing Vehicle 2s003i 4023454207 3 042448 397 Wheel Alignment and Balance 305 Wheel and Wheel Trim lsn 398 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 398 Wheel Bearings 000 ee eee eee 396 Wheel Nut Torque esa sse eRTA cee tees 354 Wind Buffeting essei o n mes 35 163 Window Fogging sssceipesiawieri typa en 258 MW ndOWS 24 caac eo uk teed cena a bas 33 Windshield Washers sss 138 382 Windshield Wiper Blades 381 Windshield Wipers cess csti sns 0000000 c eee 138 Wiper Blade Replacement 381 Wiper Reat 5 033 4 053 nese Sed des eds 139 Wipers Intermittent 0
325. spare tire is used to replace a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp to be ON a Chime will sound and the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will still show the low tire pressure value flashing on the graphic display This sequence will repeat for every key cycle until the original Tire Pressure Monitor ing System TPMS tire has been properly repaired or replaced and put back on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire CAUTION The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result es STARTING AND OPERATING 317 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the wheel rim sensor NOTE e The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition It is the driver s
326. ssenger s tempera ture setting display will be replaced with the current outside temperature Press the OUTSIDE TEMP button again or press the passenger s TEMP button to return the display to the passenger s temperature setting Electric Rear Window Defroster Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors A light in the button will illuminate to indicate the rear window defroster is ON The defroster automatically turns off after about 10 minutes of operation CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS la Starting Procedures i ccseddoysesvesvsess 266 Automatic Transmission 267 Normal Starting Above 32 F 0 C 267 Extremely Cold Weather Starting Below 20 F 7 29 C asc ig cats wis Ree 267 High Altitude Starting Above 4000 Ft 1 219 m 267 If Engine Fails To Start llus 268 After Starting cese ev Rev 269 Bi Engine Block Heater If Equipped 270 Bl Automatic Transmission sess Brake Transmission Interlock System Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock SYSTEM od tase ode eoe c a Tex n
327. stem All Wheel Drive AWD When lit solid There is an AWD system fault AWD performance will be at a reduced level Service the AWD system soon When blinking The AWD system is temporarily dis abled due to overload condition es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER e LEFT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL ON with a continuous EVIC IF EQUIPPED warning chime The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC con INVALID KEY amp FOB with a single chime sists of the following e PARK ASSIST DISABLED e Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped S SERVICE TATUS DE RUE M e SERVICE IMMOBILIZER with a single chime az e KEY FOB BATTERY LOW with a single chime e KEY amp FOB PROGRAMMED with a single chime Pressing the MENU button will change the displayed PROGRAM KEY amp FOB programming features Pressing the STEP button will e MEMORY 1 2 POSITION SET with a single chime display the available choices Pressing the MENU button MEMORY 1 2 POS SELECTED a second time accepts a selected choice e MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN PARK with a single chime e Vehicle information warning message displays e Customer programmable features e Compass display e Mini Trip functions When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SET INHIBITED DUE TO MOTION
328. stem functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP is in the Partial Off mode The Traction Control System reduces wheel slip and maintains traction at the driving front wheels The system reduces wheel slip by engaging the brake on the wheel that is losing traction spinning The system will operate at speeds below 35 mph 56 km h The system is always in the stand by mode unless e The ESP OFF Switch has been used to turn the system OFF Traction Control Switch e There is a Traction Control System malfunction 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e The system has been deactivated to prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated brake tempera tures NOTE e The Traction Control system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when in operation e Extended heavy use of Traction Control may cause the system to deactivate and turn on the traction control indicator located in the instrument cluster This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is anormal condition The system will remain disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled The system will automatically reactivate and turn off the
329. summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure Brakes In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedules WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible b
330. t bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also e Do not change the thermostat for
331. t cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash one and off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault conditions is removed and reset 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your ve hicle Undesirable system operation or sensor dam age may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 22 Airbag Light This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8 9 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 23 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages 24 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi AR tion If this lig
332. t may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc In the event that you are still having programming difficulties questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof buttons are located between the sun visors on the overhead console e 80edb0ee Power Sunroof buttons ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Press and hold the OPEN button rearward to fully open the sunroof The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full open Momentarily pressing the OPEN button rearward will activate the Express Open Feature causing the sunroof to open automatically Press and hold the VENT button to open the vent The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full vent To close the sunroof from the vent position press and hold the CLOSE button forward Releasing the button will stop the movement of the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the button is pushed forward again NOTE The power sunroof buttons remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition button has been turned off Opening either front door wi
333. t starts flashing repeat edly e Press the recirculation button until the indicator light remains lit e The selection will be stored when the ignition switch is turned OFF or if the POWER button is pressed If the recirculation indicator light is lit the recirculation mode will not reset when the engine is started If the recirculation indicator light is not lit the recirculation mode will reset to the outside air mode when the engine is started The programmed status can be changed back and forth by following the above mentioned procedure es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control The Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC System automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and front seat passenger This is accomplished by using two infrared sensors located in the center of the instrument panel The two infrared sensors independently measure the surface temperature of the driver and front seat passenger Based on the sensor input the system automatically adjusts the air temperature the airflow volume the airflow distribu tion and amount of inside air recirculation to maintain front seat occupant comfort even under changing out side weather conditions 80e550c0 Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control To operate the system press either the AUTO HI or AUTO LO buttons The system now automatically regulates the heating and air conditioni
334. t stops moving and a delay of approximately one second will occur before any other recalls can be selected 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Your vehicle has been delivered with two remote keyless entry transmitters One or both transmitters can be linked to either memory position Up to eight remote keyless entry transmitters can be used with your vehicle The memory seat system can also accommodate up to eight transmitters linked to either of the two stored seat positions or any combination of the two positions To Program Memory Seat Buttons amp RKE Transmitters Follow These Steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Select Remote Linked to Memory from the EVIC and enter Yes 3 Use the seat mirror and adjustable pedal switches to adjust the seat recliner side view mirrors and adjustable pedals to the desired positions 4 Set the radio station presets 5 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 6 Press and release the SET S button located on the driver s door A light in the button will flash telling you that you are in the set memory mode You have five seconds to complete the next step 7 Within 5 seconds press and release button 1 or 2 on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling you that the driver memory has been set A message will also be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC indicating a position has been
335. t the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines MIN OIL MARK MAX OIL MARK 809744ab Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Change Engine Oil Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following list to see if any apply to you e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and Go driving e Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi Police or delivery service commercial service e Off Road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or
336. tch is turned OFF the recircula tion feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e If the recirculation button is pressed while in the Mix or Defrost mode the indicator light in the recirculation button will flash 3 times indicating that recirculation is not allowed A C Recirculation Programming The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF and will reset to outside air mode when the ignition key is turned ON The frequent use of outside air will help keep odors from building up within the air conditioner heater housing It is recommended that the recirculation mode be used as little as possible especially in humid climates For hot and dry climates or people who are allergic to pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode necessary the recirculation mode can be programmed to not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the following procedures e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position e Set the mode control to PANEL e Depress and hold in the POWER button e Start the engine and continue to hold in the POWER button until the indicator ligh
337. tem e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute off Information Service When using AT amp T Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to b
338. temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing gt e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vice e Off road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A of the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 H 420 SCHEDULE BD M 4 Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 18 000 l Kilometers 5000 10000 14 000 19 000 24 000 29 000 Ng Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate Tires X X X M Inspect the brake linings X X F Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if X X X X X hg necessary IM Replace the engine air cleaner filter X B Change the All Wheel Drive AWD power X ng transfer unit fluid See note at the end of this Il chart Replace the air conditioning filter X S 8
339. the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File Pressing the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 RW FF CD Mode For MP3 Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection Press the RW side of the button to move back through the MP3 selection AM FM Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly DIR Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press the DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Press DISC up button 1 or DISC down button 5 to move through the folders Press the SET button to select a folder Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER RDV IF EQUIPPED The Rear Seat Audio Video System allows passengers to listen to a CD or DVD from the
340. the following steps ESN SID Access With RBB RAH and RBK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the Tape Eject or CD Bject depend ing on the radio type and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will be displayed Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits have been displayed The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits are displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With RBP RBU RAZ RB1 and RBO Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will be displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB RAH and RBK Radios Press the MODE button repeatedly until S A appears in the display A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP RBU RAZ RB1 and RBQ Radios Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SIRIUS appears in th
341. the inboard lower anchors of the two outboard seating positions A rigid mount seat can only be installed at this seating location by using the vehicle s seat belt Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two child seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position Bench Seat LATCH Anchors The lower anchor bars of the LATCH System are located where the seat back meets the seat cushion The tether anchors are located on the rear surface of the seat Child restraint systems designed to be compatible with the vehicles LATCH System are now available LATCH child restraints make installation into the vehicle simple and 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se convenient When using the LATCH System always follow the child restraint manufacturer s installation in structions NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts Tether Anchors There are tether strap anchorages behind all second row seating positions and for six passenger vehicles on the driver s side third row seating position The tether an chors are located in the rear surface of the seat When using t
342. the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un mute Mute off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect sys
343. tion e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle If this doesn t help move the child to the center rear seating position 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se and use the lap belt Never allow a child to put the Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back restraint NOTE For additional information refer to e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a The passenger seat belts are equipped
344. tion selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes Refer to your Navi gation User s Manual for detailed operating instruc tions The Rear View Camera system uses the Navigator Screen to display the area behind the vehicle Camera view will display only while the vehicle is in R Reverse 18 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows the front fog lights are ON 19 Oil Pressure Warning Light QE This light shows low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A continuous chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 20 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Re minder System BeltAlert in the Occupant Restraints section for more information es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 21 Tire Pressure Mo
345. tions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to 6 Disc CD DVD Changer RDV section of the Owner s Manual 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SALES CODE REV AM amp FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER AND CD DVD CHANGER CONTROLS NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower left side of your radio faceplate E Ho FF TUNE PUSH ONAVOL C RS MODE SET EJT AUDIO TIME DISCA DIR RND DISC V V L R INFO al el E NO NS NS INS s 817a88ea REV Radio Radio Operation Power Volume Control Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio on Turn the volume control clockwise to increase the volume NOTE Power to operate the radio is supplied through the ignition switch It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio PTY Program Type Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the TUNE button within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
346. tire to the pressure recommended by the vehicle tire pressure placard The system will automati cally update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this infor mation NOTE A low spare or compact tire pressure will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the chime to sound Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System with Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Re ceiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and too main tain the proper pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime
347. tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance 444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The t
348. to Section 8 of this manual for Mainte nance Schedules If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Special Additives Do not add any fluid additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped Under normal operating conditions periodic fluid level checks and lubricant changes for the Power Transfer Unit and Rear Carrier are not required However when the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible Power Transfer Unit The fill plug is located on the side of the power transfer unit housing The fluid should be maintained at a level even with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the vehicle is parked on a level surface If it becomes neces sary to add or replace the fluid use only the manufac turers recommended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Rear Carrier The fill plug is located on the side of the rear carrier housing The fluid should be maintained at a level even with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the vehicle is parked on a level surface if it becomes necessary
349. to add or replace the fluid use only the manufacturers recom mended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Changes The fluid should be changed as follows Normal Usage No Service Required Severe Usage Service Required Refer to Maintenance Schedule B Refer to Maintenance Schedule B Power Transfer Unit Rear Carrier 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Severe Usage is defined as 1 More than 50 of vehicle operation in stop and go traffic where vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation such as in heavy city or in construction zone traffic 2 Police taxi limousine commercial type operation or trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation NOTE Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Mainte nance Schedules Front And Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle t
350. to operate as long as the lever is pressed Upon release the rear wiper will cycle two times before return ing to the set position Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment on the driver s side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Washer Fluid Reservoir The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when Low Washer Fluid illuminates in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column pull the lever located behind the turn signal control toward you and move the steering wheel up or down as desired Release the lever to lock the steering wheel firmly in place ees Tilt Steering Column Control WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM ESP TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH TCS IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel
351. to the outside air mode when the ignition key is turned ON The frequent use of outside air will help keep odors from building up within the air conditioner heater housing It is recommended that the recirculation mode be used as little as possible especially in humid climates For hot and dry climates or people who are allergic to pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode necessary the recirculation mode can be programmed to not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the following procedures e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position e Press and hold the recirculation button es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 e While holding the recirculation button turn the igni tion switch to the RUN position e Continue holding the recirculation button for 4 sec onds then release The recirculation control is now programmed so that the recirculation mode will not reset to the outside air mode when the engine is restarted The recirculation program ming can be changed back by repeating this procedure Rear Blower Operation To operate the rear fan press the REAR button The first time this button is pressed the REAR AUTO display will illuminate indicating that the rear fan speed is automatically controlled To manually control the rear fan speed press the REAR button again and only REAR will illuminate in the display This allows the rear seat occupants to control the rear fan spe
352. tor Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Shaft Lock Module Vehicles Equipped with Premium Security System If Equipped The shaft lock module is located inside the steering column The module works in conjunction with the Sentry Key to prevent the steering shaft from rotating if someone inserts an invalid ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder in the instrument panel NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same keychain will not cause a key related transpon der fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it can not be prog
353. traction control indicator e If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud ice or snow turn the Traction Control System OFF before at tempting to rock the vehicle free POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system es STARTING AND OPERATING 287 WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possibl
354. traffic While stopped put transmission in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location Jack Location Five Passenger Seating The jack and jack handle are stowed in the rear storage bin located behind t
355. try Key is used to start a vehicle the engine will run for 2 seconds and then the security alarm will be initiated To exit alarming mode press the transmitter Unlock button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter the alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit The door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm Tamper Alert If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter the alarm has been activated Check the vehicle for tamper ing Security System Manual Override The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless entry transmitter or open the doors The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console door courtesy and liftgate lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top position e The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downw
356. tside dye ddp cytgan nds eteh LEES 89 Rearview iiu nsuceWc ug m ds we esas ia 88 Vanity isis Goad m Gada exe ened es 91 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 308 Mopar Parts 2c msg eser du tated ewe dos 368 441 Multi Function Control Lever 134 Navigation System 0 000005 146 232 New Vehicle Break In Period 79 Occupant Restraints ss sa i esta ee Rea reg Ald 40 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel Odometer lee 184 Oil Engine sica a a me yas 369 412 Capacity xe RR eX REA Ke IREE hS 411 Change Interval iisipan a pud aeae 0 eee 371 Checking neice ee ee eee cee n ee 369 Disposal srenggi Eune URS RESP ones 373 Filet sore kb Re aee EY 374 412 Filter Disposal 0 0 00 E R 373 Identification Logo 6 eee 372 Materials Added to 0 0 00 0c ee eee 373 Recommendation llle 371 411 SyntheliC ii os ap See ke ER ege d dece p 373 VISCOSILY eree heb Paper ears 372 373 411 Onboard Diagnostic System 366 367 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 154 Overdrive lle 274 Overhead Console 0 0 0 153 Overhead Travel Information Center 153 Overheating Engine 000 180 345 en INDEX 457 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 442 Panic Alarmo 23s dnos pen uy een pak RUE ER 24 Parking Brake aj oso aed ede DRESS 276 Parking On
357. ual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features The indicator light in both the AUTO HI or AUTO LO buttons will turn off when the system is being used in the manual mode The fan speed airflow distribution and outside air recirculated air can be manually adjusted NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the remaining features will continue to operate automati cally 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The front blower control can be set to any fixed blower speed by pressing the rocker switch up or down This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the auto mode The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected or until either the AUTO HI or AUTO LO buttons are pressed The system will continue to automatically adjust air temperature and airflow distribution The operator can also select the direction of the air by pressing the mode control rocker switch located to the left of the A C button and selecting one of the following positions Panel Mode Panel Outlets Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the knob up down left or right will direct the air accordingly The thumbwheel next to each outlet can be rotated to reduce or
358. uid Check 5 2 R3 390 413 HOSES 4 255 oud ones ux e ERG Ee RR 389 Warming Light isLe9k hemp ereas 182 Brakes 22932 A44 sow ese ede Ca ER 4 278 389 Brake Transmission Interlock 271 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 79 Bulb Replacement 0000000 406 Bulbs Light 200 02 cee me mn 406 Calibration Compass ossee cetaa tasu eaa es 197 Camera Rear 0 0 00 cc ee eee 146 Capacities Fluid oue cene dea 411 Caps Filler Fuel sve intus Gidea atest kath RERUM SS Oil Engine 448 INDEX a Radiator Coolant Pressure 386 Car Washes icd0c terene ed Sees kx e PR YS 397 Carbon Monoxide Warning llus 321 Cargo Area Cover aurak s pk eaka eee 167 Cargo Compartment Luggage Catier ege nps runean nba na 169 Cargo Te DOWNS xx e cs hee Od eea Hees 168 Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance 239 Catalytic Converter 1 0 eee eee 375 Caution Exhaust Gas 0 000 79 382 CD Compact Disc Changer 208 218 221 CD Compact Disc Player 202 206 212 216 221 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 240 Cellular Phone llle 91 240 Chains Tire 2222508 e082 834 8G be WE Ae eas 306 Changing A Plat Tire ess Race me 346 Chart Tite Sizing iue dia te es bee eS 290 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light Child Restraint 000 cece eee 67 69 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 71 74 Child S
359. ure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position and press the time button Using the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object press either the hour H or minute M buttons on the radio 2 Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set minutes The time setting will increase each time you press a button RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave am
360. ush in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilome ters The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 11 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 12 AutoStick Light This display indicator illuminates when the gearshift lever is moved to the AutoStick position 13 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven Therefore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the Trip Odometer button To reset a trip odom eter display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets ap proximately 2 seconds es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster odometer Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the GASCAP message off
361. vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Each vehicle is equipped with two child restraint anchor age systems called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed on second row seats only LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are not provided on the six passenger third row seats 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Six passenger vehicles are equipped with second row fold amp tumble seats with lower anchorages that can accommodate rigid mount or flexible webbing mounted LATCH compatible child seats The third row seating positions are not equipped with lower anchorages How ever the third row driver side seating position is equipped with a tether anchor If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in any third row seating position you must use the vehicle s seat belt Fold amp Tumble Seat Latch Anchorages ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Five passenger vehicles are equipped with a second row bench seat only The two outboard seating positions have lower anchorages that can accommodate rigid mount or flexible webbing mounted LATCH compatible child seats The center seating position of the bench seat can also accommodate a flexible webbing mounted LATCH compatible child seat by using
362. vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Call Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call Dial by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial or Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phonebook The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin
363. ver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects Programming HomeLink NOTE When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside the garage Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the second or Accessory position for programming and or operation of HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient train ing and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display which includes HomeLink system messages 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and release only when the indicator light begins to flash or the EVIC display shows Channels Cleared after 20 seconds Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M seconds and do not repeat Step One to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink buttons Homelink Buttons 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button that you want to train and the hand held trans mitter buttons Do not release t
364. ver s Power Seat If Equipped Zero Oh The driver s power seat switches are located on the Add location Add Haw driver s front door trim panel The bottom switch con All All of them trols up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment f The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts and the middle switch controls the lumbar adjustment Delete a name Delete ee x Language Select language List names List all List paired phones List phones Pager Beeper Phone pairing Pairing Phonebook Phone book Return to main menu Return Main menu Select phone select Set up Phone settings phone set up 10 Way Driver s Power Seat es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 WARNING Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured 8 Way Driver s Power Seat If Equipped The driver s power seat switches are located on the driver s front door trim panel The bottom switch con trols up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment 4 Way Passenger s Power Seat The front passenger power seat switches are located on the passenger front door trim panel The bottom switch controls forward and rearward adjustment The top s
365. vider for the features that you have 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call fro
366. when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTERS 811baacb Front Airbag Components NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment in low speed collisions The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Also the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification Refer to Occupant Classification System in this section This vehicle may also be equipped with a driver inflat able knee blocker located on the instrument panel below the steering column This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right window bags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with wind
367. will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each low tire condition that it detects In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the number of tire s that are low followed by the Tire Low Pressure text message Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the pressure recommended by the vehicle tire pressure placard The system will automati cally update the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressure have been received NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this infor mation NOTE A low spare or compact tire pressure will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the chime to sound 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Service Tire System Soon The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 60 seconds in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON text message The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes without an audible chime until the condition no longer exists
368. wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a station is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM stations to be locked into memory You can recall the stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push button twice To Change From Clock To Radio Mode Press the TIME button to change the display between radio frequency and time General Information This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE Changes or modifications not expressively ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CD Player Operation NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the volume control ON before the CD player will operate e This Radio is capable of playing compact d
369. witch controls the seatback recline adjustment CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the head restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise the head restraint pull up on the head 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M restraint To lower the head restraint depress the release Heated Seats If Equipped tab located at the base of the head restraint and push This feature heats the driver front passenger and second row seats The controls for the front heated seats are located on the door trim panel next to the power seat switches down on the head restraint Adjustable Head Restraints Front Heated Seat Switch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Press the switch once to select a heat setting high or low and press the switch a second time in the same direction to turn the heated seat off The indicator light will show when LOW or HIGH heat is ON The controls for the second row heated seats are located on the center console between the seats Press the switch once to select a heat setting high or low and press the switch a second time in the
370. with cinching deploying passenger airbag which may cause se latch plates which are designed to keep the lap vere or fatal injury to the infant portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the 2 vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the
371. y the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift into Park P e Turn the key to OFF then restart the engine e Shift into the desired range and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset dealer service is required Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range P Park Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis sion The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range es STARTING AND OPERATING 273 WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for the interlock system In order to override this system the key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or ON positions Pull up and rearward on the shifter bezel ring The override can be activated by pressing the pink colored tab which can be accessed through the lower right corner of the shifter bezel ring While th
372. y Removal Automatic Transaxle Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key Ignition Key Positions en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the lever in PARK the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service NOTE The power window switches radio power outlets and removable console if equipped will remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHI
373. y show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 443 Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of
374. you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system compon

Chrysler 2007 Pacifica Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents